JP7358128B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is fired into a game area by a firing device, and when the game ball enters a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There are things that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display area is provided in which identification information can be displayed variably (also referred to as "fluctuation"), and when the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display area becomes a specific display result, the gaming state (game There are machines (so-called pachinko machines) that are configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled).

In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets on a predetermined game medium for one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information in the variable display area. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display area, the variable display of identification information is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all variable display areas is stopped. A winning occurs according to the display result derived when the game stops, a predetermined game medium is paid out according to the winning, and when a specific winning occurs, the gaming state is changed to a predetermined gaming value to the player. There are some machines that are configured to give the same amount of money to players (so-called slot machines).

Note that gaming value refers to the fact that the payout of prize balls and the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine are advantageous to the player who is likely to hit a prize with a ball, and This means creating a right to become in a state, or creating a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are more likely to be met.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived as a display result of the variable display of production symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display area based on the winning of a game ball in the starting prize opening. A “jackpot” occurs when the Note that the derivation display means to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a jackpot occurs, for example, a jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times and the game enters a jackpot game state in which it is easy to hit a winning ball. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes are won in the big winning hole, the big winning hole is closed. The number of times the big prize opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the grand prize opening will be closed when the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize opening may be referred to as a round. Moreover, a game in a round is sometimes called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display area, symbols other than the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left-center right symbols) continue to stop and oscillate for a predetermined period of time in a state that matches a specific display result. The jackpot may occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, scaling, or deformation, or multiple symbols are changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. A performance performed in a state where sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach performance. In addition, the reach state and its appearance are called the reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a variable reach display. Then, if the display result of the symbol variably displayed in the variable display area is not a specific display result, it becomes a "miss" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying finding out how to generate a jackpot.

Further, the pachinko game machine is configured to be settable to any one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set value. In some cases, based on the set value, a performance suggesting the set value is performed by displaying three types of performance patterns corresponding to three types of characters: giraffe, elephant, and lion (for example, Patent Document 1 reference.).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (Figure 12)

In such gaming machines, there is room for improvement to enhance the gameplay.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect indicating that the control is in the advantageous state;
Preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparation performance that foretells that the suggestion performance will be executed before the suggestion performance is executed;
The suggestion performance includes a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance, and a third suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance,
The preparation performance includes a first preparation performance that foretells that the first suggestion performance will be executed, and a second preparation performance that foretells that the second suggestion performance will be executed,
The first preparation performance and the second suggestion performance have different execution periods,
The third suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel in the same period and independently from each other,
The third suggestion is more effective when neither the first preparatory effect nor the second preparatory effect is executed than when either the first preparatory effect or the second preparatory effect is executed. Directions are easier to execute,
The first preparation performance includes a first performance mode and a second performance mode that is controlled to be more advantageous than the first performance mode and has a higher expectation level,
When the first preparation performance is executed in the second performance mode, the first preparation performance is executed in parallel with the third suggestion performance more than when the first preparation performance is executed in the first performance mode. A high percentage of
The third suggestion performance has a lower degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance,
The preparation performance execution means is capable of executing the first preparation performance in a first performance pattern in which the first suggestion performance is executed after execution, and a second performance pattern in which the first suggestion performance is not performed after execution. can be,
When the first preparation performance is executed in the second performance pattern, the second suggestion performance is more likely to be executed than when the first preparation performance is not performed in the second performance pattern.
It is characterized by
(Means 1) A gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of setting values (for example, The setting means that can be set to any one of the setting values (setting values "1" to "6") (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, when the power is turned on, a setting confirmation process or a setting change process is executed, and the current a part for checking set values and changing set values), and a specific effect execution means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute specific effects (for example, specific effects in the first to seventh aspects). Steps 102IWS503, S506, S509, S512, S515, S518, S521, S907) and a variable display execution means capable of executing variable display (for example, a part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) ), and a ready-to-reach effect execution means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the fluctuation pattern is one of Pt13, Pt15, Pt21, and Pt22, step 102IWS805 is executed ), and the specific performance execution means includes a plurality of performance modes including a specific mode (for example, a third mode, a fourth mode) and a special mode different from the specific mode (for example, a first mode). A second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, set value "1") is set and controlled to be advantageous to the player. When the set value (for example, the set value "6") is set and the control is in an advantageous state, the specific performance of the special mode is executed at a higher rate (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the specific performance in the special mode as shown in FIG. By determining whether or not to execute the first specific effect using the first specific effect execution lottery table shown in A), the set value "6" is set and the first specific effect is executed at a higher rate in the case of a jackpot), and it is possible to execute the specific effect while the reach effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 It is possible to perform a specific performance during the reach (see Figure 8-9)), and furthermore, a suggestive performance that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state (for example, a hold display preview performance, a timer performance, a chance notice performance, etc.) and a preparatory performance that can execute a preparatory performance that foretells that the suggestive performance will be executed (for example, a pending display notice preparatory performance or a timer preparation performance) before the suggestive performance is executed. and an execution means, and the suggestion performance includes a first suggestion performance (for example, a pending display notice performance), a second suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance (for example, a timer performance), and the first suggestion performance. and a third suggestion performance (for example, a chance notice performance) that is different from the second suggestion performance, and the preparation performance includes a first preparation performance (for example, a pending display) that foretells that the first suggestion performance will be executed. The third suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance include: They can be executed in parallel during the same period (see Figures 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the first preparation performance is faster than when either the first preparation performance or the second preparation performance is being executed. The third suggestive effect is more likely to be executed when neither the preparatory effect nor the second preparatory effect is executed (for example, see FIG. 12-10). According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the specific effect execution means corresponds to the control of the advantageous state, and the preview mode (for example, the fifth mode, the sixth mode) that corresponds to the setting suggestion regarding the setting means, and the control of the advantageous state. However, it may be possible to execute specific effects of a plurality of effect modes including suggestion modes (for example, third mode, fourth mode) corresponding to setting suggestions regarding the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

(Means 3) In means 1 or 2, the specific performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance that targets variable displays that have not yet started (for example, executes a specific performance as a pre-read preview performance or a pending continuous performance). It may be possible to do so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

(Means 4) Any one of the means 1 to 3 includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display, and a reach effect execution means capable of executing a reach effect during the variable display, and the specific effect execution means is a reach effect execution means capable of executing a reach effect during the variable display. It is also possible to execute a specific performance in a special mode based on the player's movement during the execution of the performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 102IWS906 to S909). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

(Means 5) In any one of means 1 to 4, a gaming machine is capable of controlling a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage (for example, a variable probability jackpot, a normal jackpot), and the specific performance execution means is It is possible to execute a specific performance in a special mode when the is controlled to a highly advantageous state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the first specific performance only in the case of a probability variable jackpot (Fig. 8-7 ( See A)). According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state with a high degree of advantage, it is suggested that a setting value with a high degree of advantage is set, so that the interest can be improved.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to 5, the gaming machine is capable of being controlled into multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage, and the specific performance execution means is controlled to be in an advantageous state with a low degree of advantage. (For example, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the first specific performance only when there is a normal jackpot.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to being controlled to an advantageous state with a low advantage, and it is also possible to stimulate the player's desire to continue playing the game.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to 6, there is provided a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and the setting means includes: A plurality of setting values including at least an advantageous setting value and a disadvantageous setting value with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most disadvantageous setting value to the most advantageous setting value to the player) (up to 6) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the setting value change process), and is used to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state. A random value generation means for determination (for example, random number circuit 104) capable of generating a random value for determination, a random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination, and a setting value set by the setting means. An advantageous state determination means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes special symbol normal processing) that determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the advantageous state determination value. A game control means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can control the game to an advantageous state based on the judgment means to control the game to an advantageous state. The probability of being controlled to be in an advantageous state differs depending on the set value, as the number of advantageous state judgment values differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in Figures 9-1 to 9-10, (The probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state differs depending on the number of jackpot judgment values), the advantageous state judgment value is a multi-step setting value that can be set by a setting means within a predetermined numerical range. At least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) is set, and the advantageous condition determination value of the advantageous setting value is within the common numerical range within the predetermined numerical range. and a non-common numerical range that is not set in the advantageous condition judgment value of the unfavorable setting value (for example, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value that is a range from 1238 to a value according to each setting value). The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be consecutive numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in Figures 9-7 and 9-8, the number of jackpots is The numerical range may be set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

(Means 8) In any of the means 1 to 7, a variable display means (for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a CPU 120 for performance control) capable of performing a variable display (for example, a variable display) is advantageous for the player. an advantageous state control means (e.g., microcomputer 100 for game control) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state), and a display means (e.g., CPU 120 for performance control, image display device 5); The display means includes a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion regarding the setting means (for example, a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the realized role is "Bell") and a specific display corresponding to a suggestion for control of an advantageous state (for example, a combination of mini-slot symbols in which the realized role is "Watermelon"). ”, “Cherry”, or “Set of 7” mini-slot symbol combinations, “No display”, “CHANCE”, “Very hot”, or “FEVER” symbols) can be displayed, and the display period is variable. A special display can be displayed when is for a predetermined period (if the variation pattern (variation time) is a non-reach miss (10 seconds), a normal reach miss (30 seconds), or a normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), the winning combination is " When the variable display period is longer than a predetermined period, it is possible to display a special display and then a specific display (for example, a variable pattern (variable time) is a super reach miss (120 seconds) or a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), after the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "Bell" is stopped and displayed, the winning combination is "Watermelon" and "Cherry". ” or a combination of mini-slot symbols that result in a set of 7, and furthermore, it is possible to display the symbols “No display”, “CHANCE”, “Very hot”, or “FEVER” in a static manner. ) may also be used as a thing. According to such a configuration, the special display can be displayed with priority over the specific display, so that the interest in setting suggestions can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions related to gaming machines of means 9 to 13 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, a suggestion effect indicating that the game machine will be controlled in an advantageous state, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2017-131277, and a suggestion effect before the suggestion effect is executed, have been performed. There was one that was configured to be able to carry out a preparatory performance foretelling the event. However, in such gaming machines, there is a risk that interest may actually decrease if another effect is executed while the effect that increases expectations is being executed. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can maintain the following.

(Means 9) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a suggestive effect (for example, a hold display notice effect or a timer effect) that suggests that the machine will be controlled to an advantageous state. , a chance preview performance, etc.), and a preparatory performance that foretells that the suggestion performance will be executed before the suggestion performance is executed (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.). ), and the suggestion presentation includes a first suggestion presentation (for example, a pending display notice presentation) and a second suggestion presentation (for example, a timer presentation) that is different from the first suggestion presentation. , a third suggestion performance (for example, a chance preview performance) different from the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, and the preparation performance is a first preparation that foretells that the first suggestion performance will be executed. The third suggestion presentation, the first preparation presentation, and The second preparation performance can be executed in parallel during the same period (see Figures 12-11 (A1) and (A2)), and can be performed from the time either the first preparation performance or the second preparation performance is being executed. Also, the third suggestion performance is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation performance nor the second preparation performance is executed (for example, see FIG. 12-10).
According to such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

(Means 10) In means 9, the first preparation performance and the second preparation performance are executed for different periods (for example, after the execution of the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode) is completed, the timer preparation performance is may be executed (see FIG. 12-7(D)).
According to such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

(Means 11) In the means 9 or 10, the first suggested presentation includes multiple types of presentation modes (for example, a first presentation mode (blue), a second presentation mode (green), a third presentation mode (red), etc.). (See Figure 12-3 (A)), and the first preparation performance is performed in multiple types of performance modes (for example, the first performance mode (small effect), the second production mode (large effect), etc.). (See FIG. 12-3 (B)), and the production mode of the first suggestion production that can be executed differs depending on which production mode the first preparation production is executed. For example, when the hold display preview preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed, the hold display preview performance is executed according to any of the first to third performance modes, and the hold display preview preparation performance of the second performance mode is executed. When the effect is executed, a pending display preview effect may be executed in one of the second to third effect modes.
According to such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

(Means 12) In any of the means 9 to 11, the suggestion effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect (for example, when it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect or the timer effect, There are cases where it is determined that the pending display notice preparation performance or the timer preparation performance will not be executed (see Figures 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B)), depending on whether or not a corresponding preparation performance has been executed. , the ease of execution is different (for example, as shown in Figure 12-3, if the winning determination result is a jackpot, it is likely to be determined to execute the pending display notice performance and the pending display notice preparation performance. As shown in 12-4, it is likely to be decided to execute the timer effect as well. However, it may be determined not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, when a hold display notice preparation effect that does not correspond to the timer effect is executed. In this case, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the hold display preview preparation effect is not executed.
According to such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

(Means 13) In any one of means 9 to 12, the ratio of which presentation mode of suggestion presentation is executed varies depending on whether or not the preparation presentation is executed (for example, pending display preview presentation or When the performance mode of the timer preparation performance is determined to be the second performance mode, the proportion of decisions to execute the hold display notice preparation performance or the timer preparation performance is higher than when the performance mode is determined to be the first performance mode. -3(B), see FIG. 12-4(B)).
According to such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the performance control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a preview performance setting process. It is an explanatory diagram showing a first specific performance execution lottery table to a seventh specific performance execution lottery table and a special performance execution lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display in production control process processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display of an image display device in specific production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of the jackpot and the numerical value range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of a big hit and the numerical value range of a small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a probability change state. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of the big hit and the numerical value range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a figure showing the numerical value range of a big hit and the numerical value range of a small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probability change state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each display information displayed on an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process performed at the time of a fluctuation|variation start. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion, and (H1) and (H2) are expectation level notices used when executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to perform a performance, and (I1) and (I2) are for determining whether or not to perform an expectation level preview performance, which is used when the first setting suggestion performance is not performed. (J) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the production mode of the second change production. (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a successful combination determination table for the expectation level preview performance, which is used when the first setting suggestion performance is executed, and (L) is an explanatory diagram used when the first setting suggestion performance is not executed. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the winning combination of the expectation level preview performance, and (M) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion performance. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of presentation modes regarding various presentations. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of presentation modes regarding various presentations. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (for jackpot A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (for jackpot B, jackpot C), (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for failure. (A) is a front view of the display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the starting prize receiving command buffer. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows random numerical value judgment processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a part of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows advance notice setting processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern of a pre-read preview effect. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the performance pattern of the jackpot suggestion performance and the setting suggestion performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display. be. It is a figure showing the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of setting suggestion production. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process during front part variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performances to be executed as suggestion performances during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion production has been decided, and (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the production to be executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. (C) is a diagram showing a performance pattern of a character performance and a timer performance to be performed as a suggestion performance during the front variable display. (D) is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation level of character performance and timer performance and the execution expectation level of setting suggestion performance. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of character performance, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of performance patterns of timer performance, and (C) is a diagram showing the contents of each performance pattern of timer performance. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the performance execution period in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision rate as a suggestion production during the front variable display of a character production and a timer production in a modification, and the execution expectation level of a setting suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a reservation memory display and an effect image in a modification. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion performance in the variable display of normal reach, non-shortened non-reach, and shortened non-reach in a modified example. It is a flowchart which shows a part of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold display preview performance determination table and a hold display preview preparation performance determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a timer performance determination table and a timer advance notice preparation performance determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye preview production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pre-read notice execution process. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timing of a pending display notice performance (preparation performance) and a timer performance (preparation performance). FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing performance aspects of a hold display preview preparation performance and a timer preparation performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of opportunity notice setting processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute a chance notice. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing performance aspects of a hold display preview preparation performance and a chance preview performance.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the gaming area), a variable display (also referred to as a special game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible displays that correspond to variable displays.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. Further, the sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

Furthermore, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. Accordingly, the first pending memory number is displayed, and the second pending display 25B displays the second pending memory number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (it is also said that the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters the open state where the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc., described later), and the jackpot can be adjusted accordingly. Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", will be returned to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be done by turning on/off the light, moving the movable body 32, etc.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 2, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S9). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), as well as backup flag states and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc. (For details, see (described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to send the production control command to the production control board 12 to specify the determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and the pre-read judgment. . The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process processing, for example, the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance control process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 102IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 102IW will be explained.

(Jackpot probability)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability for each set value. In this example, the setting value can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to execute setting confirmation processing and setting change processing to check current setting values and change setting values. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 stages or more, for example.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-1, in the variable probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "247/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players. In addition, in the example shown in Figure 8-1, in the variable probability state (high probability state), the overall probability of winning the jackpot is 10 times higher than in the non-variable state (low probability state), and the setting value "1" '' has the lowest jackpot probability of ``2050/65536'' and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2470/65536", which is the highest. This is the most advantageous setting for players.

In addition, in this feature section 102IW, a game machine without a small win will be explained, but in a game machine with a small win, any of the set values "1" to "6" will be used for the small win. The probability of a small hit may be constant regardless of whether there is a variable probability state or whether the probability variable state is a variable probability state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state).

In addition, when it is determined that it is a jackpot, the jackpot type such as normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) or probability variable jackpot is also determined. Each jackpot type is determined with the same probability regardless of whether it is. In addition, in a gaming machine that is provided with a small win, it may be possible to configure it so that when a small win is determined, multiple types of small win are further determined, but regarding the small win type, Each small win type may be determined with the same probability regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

Further, when starting a variable display, a variable pattern is determined, and each variable pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

The characteristic portion 102IW is provided with a variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-2. As shown in FIG. 8-2, as a variation pattern when the variable display result is a miss, there is a variation pattern Pt11 in which the production content is a non-reaching error and the variation time is 5 seconds, and a variation pattern Pt11 where the production content is a non-reaching error and the variation time is 5 seconds. Variation pattern Pt12 has a short variation time of 2 seconds; variation pattern Pt13 has a production content that is out of normal reach and has a variation time of 15 seconds; and variation pattern Pt13 has a production content that is out of normal reach and has a variation time of 30 seconds. A variation pattern Pt14 is provided. In addition, as shown in Figure 8-2, as a variation pattern when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a variation pattern Pt21 in which the production content is a normal reach jackpot and the variation time is 15 seconds, and a variation pattern Pt21 where the production content is a super reach jackpot. A variation pattern Pt22 in which the variation time is 30 seconds is provided.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
The characteristic portion 084IW is provided with a variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-2. As shown in FIG. 8-2, as a variation pattern when the variable display result is a miss, there is a variation pattern Pt11 in which the production content is a non-reaching error and the variation time is 5 seconds, and a variation pattern Pt11 where the production content is a non-reaching error and the variation time is 5 seconds. Variation pattern Pt12 has a short variation time of 2 seconds; variation pattern Pt13 has a production content that is out of normal reach and has a variation time of 15 seconds; and variation pattern Pt13 has a production content that is out of normal reach and has a variation time of 30 seconds. A variation pattern Pt14 is provided. In addition, as shown in Figure 8-2, as a variation pattern when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a variation pattern Pt21 in which the production content is a normal reach jackpot and the variation time is 15 seconds, and a variation pattern Pt21 where the production content is a super reach jackpot. A variation pattern Pt22 in which the variation time is 30 seconds is provided.

FIG. 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIG. 8-3, command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. (each corresponds to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used as shown in FIG. 8-2, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. Note that "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving the command 80XX(H), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are performance control commands that indicate whether or not to make a jackpot and the type of jackpot. Since the production control CPU 120 determines the display result of the decorative pattern according to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a production control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating to start variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating to start variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that the variable pattern command may include information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol.

Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) that indicates that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the performance control CPU 120 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) that is transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) that is transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 sends a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, sends an initialization designation command. Send a command.

Command 9F00 (H) is a performance control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that designates displaying a fanfare screen, that is, the start of a jackpot game.

The command A1XX(H) is a production control command (a command for specifying when the big winning hole is open) that indicates the display of the big winning hole being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the grand prize opening specifying command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data for each round, a different grand prize opening specifying command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the 1st round during a jackpot game, a jackpot opening designation command (A101(H)) that specifies round 1 is sent, and when executing the 10th round during a jackpot game, In this case, a big prize opening specifying command (A10A(H)) specifying round 10 is transmitted. A2XX(H) is a performance control command (designated command after opening the grand prize opening) indicating closing of the big winning opening for the number of rounds (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the designation command after the opening of the big winning hole is transmitted for each round, a value that designates that round is set in the EXT data, so a different after opening designation command of the big winning hole is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the 1st round during a jackpot game, a designation command after jackpot opening (A201(H)) that specifies round 1 is sent, and when ending the 10th round during a jackpot game. In this case, a designation command (A20A(H)) after opening the big winning hole that designates round 10 is transmitted.

Command A301 (H) is a performance control command (jackpot end designation command: ending 1 designation command) that designates displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game. The jackpot end designation command (A301(H)) is used to end a jackpot game based on a "normal jackpot" or a "probable variable jackpot."

Command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) indicating that the setting value indicated by XX is being used. For example, when the setting value is "1", the setting value command (E101(H)) specifies the setting value "1", and when the setting value is "2", the setting value command (E102(H)) specifies the setting value "2". (H)) specifies the setting value "3" when the setting value is "3", and the setting value command (E103(H)) specifies the setting value "4" when the setting value is "4". When the value command (E104(H)) is the setting value "5", the setting value is "5". When the setting value command (E105(H)) is the setting value "6", the setting value is "6". A setting value command (E106(H)) specifying the value is transmitted.

(Command analysis processing)
FIG. 8-4 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 102IWS301). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 102IWS302). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 102IWS303). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received production control command is a setting value command (step 102IWS304), the production control CPU 120 stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command in the setting value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 102IWS305).

If the received production control command is a variation pattern command (production control command that specifies a variation pattern) (step 102 IWS306), the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage formed in the RAM 122. It is stored in the area (step 102 IWS307). Then, a variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 102IWS308).

If the received performance control command is a display result designation command (a performance control command that specifies whether or not it is a jackpot and the jackpot type) (step 102 IWS309), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the RAM 122. (Step 102 IWS310).

If the received production control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (a production control command that specifies the final display of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol) (step 102IWS311), the production control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag ( Step 102IWS312).

If the received performance control command is another command, the performance control CPU 120 stores the received performance control command or sets a flag according to the received performance control command (step 102IWS313). Then, the process moves to step 102 IWS301.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-5 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 102IWS201).

In step 102IWS202, the production control CPU 120 determines the display result of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 102IWS201 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). (stop symbol) is determined (step 102 IWS202). That is, by executing the process of step 102IWS202 by the production control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 102IWS202, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 102IWS202, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates a probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. For example, if the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot), the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same even numbered symbols as the stop symbols. do.

Further, if the received display result designation command indicates a failure, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

For example, the performance control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance setting process to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance (for example, a specific performance or a special performance described later) on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative symbols ( Step 102IWS203).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a variable pattern and a preview performance (for example, a line preview performance, a step-up preview performance, a mini character preview performance, a group preview performance, and a special performance) if it has been determined that the execution is A process table corresponding to the determined preview effect is selected (step 102 IWS 214). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 102IWS215).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 in the effect control board 12. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. It's okay.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 102IWS216).

In addition, in this characteristic part 102IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step 102IWS217). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 102 IWS218), and ends the variable display start setting process.

FIG. 8-6 is a flowchart showing the preview effect setting process (step 102IWS203). In the preview performance setting process, the performance control CPU 120 can set the execution of a specific performance and the execution of a special performance, respectively. Here, the specific performance and special performance will be explained.

The "specific effect" is an effect in which a roulette image is rotated and displayed in a predetermined area of the image display device 5, and a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed when the push button 31B is operated during a predetermined validity period. . As the specific effects, there are provided first to seventh modes in which the patterns that stop when the push button 31B is operated during a predetermined validity period are different. Specifically, in the specific effect of the first mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first specific effect"), the stopping pattern is "7" (see Figure 8-9 (D1)), and the specific effect of the second mode In the production (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second specific production"), the picture that stops is "BAR" (see Figure 8-9 (D2)), and the specific production in the third mode (hereinafter referred to as "third specific production") is ), the stopping pattern is a cherry (see Figure 8-9 (D3)), and in the fourth aspect of the specific effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "fourth specific effect"), the stopping pattern is a cherry. It is a watermelon (see Figure 8-9 (D4)), and in the specific effect of the fifth mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "fifth specific effect"), the pattern that stops is "extremely hot" (Figure 8-9 (D5)), the specific effect of the sixth mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "sixth specific effect"), the stopping pattern is a "chance" (see Figure 8-9 (D6)), and the seventh mode In the specific effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "seventh specific effect"), the symbol that stops is a bell (see FIG. 8-9 (D7)). In addition, in any specific performance, if the push button 31B is not operated during the predetermined validity period, the bell is stopped (see FIG. 8-9 (D7)). This encourages players to actively participate in the game.

The first specific performance and the second specific performance are performances that have the functions of a setting value suggestion that suggests which setting value is set, and a reliability suggestion that suggests the confidence level that it will be a jackpot. . The third specific performance and the fourth specific performance are performances that have a setting value suggestion function but do not have a reliability suggestion function. The fifth specific performance and the sixth specific performance are performances that have a reliability suggestion function but do not have a setting value suggestion function. The seventh specific performance is a performance that does not have any function of reliability suggestion or setting value suggestion.

The "special performance" is a performance that announces that there will be a jackpot. Specifically, a special performance LED (not shown) is provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and a performance in which the special performance LED emits light in rainbow colors is executed as a special performance. The lamp control board 14 in the feature section 102IW is equipped with various circuits for driving the special effect LED, and drives the special effect LED based on the lamp signal supplied from the display control section 123, and the lamp control board 14 drives the special effect LED based on the lamp signal supplied from the display control section 123. The special effect LED is turned on/off in a manner specified by.

Further, both the specific performance and the special performance are performances that can be executed in a ready-to-reach state. As described above, since the specific performance is a performance using the image display device 5 and the special performance is a performance using the special performance LED, the execution period of the specific performance and the execution period of the special performance overlapped. The configuration allows execution without interfering with each other in any case.

Note that if a specific performance and a special performance are executed overlappingly at the same time, the performance will become complicated and it will be difficult for the player to recognize the contents of multiple performances, so this is In order to prevent this, the specific performance and the special performance may be performed so that the specific performance and the special performance are not repeated at the same time. For example, the execution period of the specific performance and the execution period of the special performance may be set in advance as a period that cannot overlap. Alternatively, if the execution period of the specific production and the special production are set in advance as a period that can overlap, and if the execution period of the specific production and the execution period of the special production overlap, the specific production and the special production are Execution of at least one of the effects may be restricted. For example, if the execution period of a specific performance and the execution period of a special performance overlap, the performance of one of the performances may be prohibited (cancelled) or the execution timing of one or both may be shifted. It may be possible to prevent special effects from being executed repeatedly at the same time.

In the preview performance setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not it is a non-reach variation (step 102 IWS500), and if it is a non-reach variation, it immediately ends the preview performance setting process. Whether or not it is a non-reach variation can be confirmed by referring to the variation pattern command read out in step 102 IWS 201.

If it is not a non-reach variation, the performance control CPU 120 performs a first specific performance execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute the first specific performance (step 102IWS501). Specifically, the first specific effect execution lottery is performed using the first specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(A).

FIG. 8-7(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first specific effect execution lottery table. In the first specific performance execution lottery table shown in Figure 8-7(A), the first specific performance is executed for each set value (“1” to “6”) and variable display result (probable variable jackpot, normal jackpot, miss). Judgment values are assigned for the presence or absence of .

For example, when the variable display result is a probability-variable jackpot, when the set value is one of "1" to "5", it is not decided to execute the first specific performance, and when the set value is "6", it is not decided to execute. It is decided to execute the first specific performance at a rate of 5%. Further, for example, when the variable display result is a normal jackpot or a miss, it is not determined to execute the first specific performance regardless of the set value.

In this manner, the first specific performance is a performance that definitely informs that the set value is "6" and that the variable display result is a variable jackpot.

When it is determined to execute the first specific effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the first specific effect (Y in step 102IWS502, S503), and moves to step 102IWS522.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines not to execute the first specific performance, it performs a second specific performance execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute the second specific performance (step 102IWS504). Specifically, the second specific effect execution lottery is performed using the second specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(B).

FIG. 8-7(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second specific effect execution lottery table. In the second specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(B), determination is made as to whether or not the second specific effect is executed for each set value (“1” to “6”) and variable display result (big hit, loss). A value has been assigned.

For example, when the variable display result is a jackpot, it is not decided to execute the second specific performance when the set value is between "1" and "3", and when the set value is between "4" and "6". If either of these is the case, it is decided to execute the second specific performance at a rate of 10%. Further, for example, when the variable display result is a normal jackpot or a miss, it is not determined to execute the second specific performance regardless of the set value.

In this way, the second specific performance confirms that the set value is one of "4" to "6" (the set value is set to be advantageous to the player) and that the variable display result is a jackpot. It is a performance that conveys a lot of information.

Note that "advantageous setting values" and "unfavorable setting values" for players are those that are classified based on the jackpot probability (setting values for which the jackpot probability is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold are considered "advantageous setting values"). , a setting value that is less than a predetermined threshold value is considered a "disadvantageous setting value"), or it may be classified based on the ball output rate (ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls fired). (a setting value where the ball payout rate is 100% or more is an "advantageous setting value" and a setting value where the ball payout rate is less than 100% is an "unfavorable setting value").

When it is determined to execute the second specific effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the second specific effect (Y of step 102IWS505, S506), and moves to step 102IWS522.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines not to execute the second specific performance, it performs a third specific performance execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute the third specific performance (step 102IWS507). Specifically, a third specific effect execution lottery is performed using the third specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(C).

FIG. 8-7(C) is an explanatory diagram showing the third specific effect execution lottery table. In the third specific performance execution lottery table shown in Figure 8-7(C), it is determined whether or not the third specific performance is executed for each setting value (“1” to “6”) and variable display result (big hit, loss). A value has been assigned.

For example, regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss, if the set value is "1", it is decided to execute the third specific performance at a rate of 1%, and the set value is "1". When the set value is "2", it is decided to execute the third specific effect at a rate of 2%, and when the set value is "3", it is decided to execute the third specific effect at a rate of 3%, and the set value is "4", it is decided to execute the third specific performance at a rate of 4%, and when the set value is "5", it is decided to execute the third specific performance at a rate of 5%, When the set value is "6", it is decided to execute the third specific performance at a rate of 6%.

In this way, the third specific performance suggests that a setting value that is advantageous to the player is set, but does not suggest a variable display result.

When it is determined to execute the third specific effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the third specific effect (Y of step 102IWS508, S509), and moves to step 102IWS522.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines not to perform the third specific performance, it performs a fourth specific performance execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute the fourth specific performance (step 102IWS510). Specifically, the fourth specific effect execution lottery is performed using the fourth specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(D).

FIG. 8-7(D) is an explanatory diagram showing the fourth specific effect execution lottery table. In the fourth specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(D), determination is made as to whether or not the fourth specific effect is executed for each setting value (“1” to “6”) and variable display result (big hit, loss). A value has been assigned.

For example, regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss, when the set value is "1", it is decided to execute the fourth specific effect at a rate of 11%, and the set value is "1". When the set value is "2", it is decided to execute the fourth specific effect at a rate of 12%, and when the set value is "3", it is decided to execute the fourth specific effect at a rate of 13%, and the set value When the set value is "4", it is decided to execute the fourth specific effect at a rate of 14%, and when the set value is "5", it is decided to execute the fourth specific effect at a rate of 15%, When the set value is "6", it is decided to execute the fourth specific effect at a rate of 16%.

In this way, the fourth specific performance suggests that a setting value that is advantageous to the player is set, but does not suggest a variable display result.

When it is determined to execute the fourth specific effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the fourth specific effect (Y in step 102IWS511, S512), and moves to step 102IWS522.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines not to perform the fourth specific performance, it performs a fifth specific performance execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute the fifth specific performance (step 102IWS513). Specifically, the fifth specific effect execution lottery is performed using the fifth specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(E).

FIG. 8-7(E) is an explanatory diagram showing the fifth specific effect execution lottery table. In the fifth specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(E), it is determined whether or not the fifth specific effect is executed for each set value (“1” to “6”) and variable display result (big hit, loss). A value has been assigned.

For example, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the fifth specific performance at a rate of 30% regardless of the set value from "1" to "6". Further, for example, if the variable display result is a failure, it is determined to execute the fifth specific effect at a rate of 5% regardless of the set value from "1" to "6".

In this way, the fifth specific performance is a performance that suggests whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot, but does not suggest which set value is set.

If it is determined to execute the fifth specific effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the fifth specific effect (Y in step 102IWS514, S515), and moves to step 102IWS522.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines not to execute the fifth specific performance, it performs a sixth specific performance execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute the sixth specific performance (step 102IWS516). Specifically, the second specific effect execution lottery is performed using the sixth specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(F).

FIG. 8-7(F) is an explanatory diagram showing the sixth specific effect execution lottery table. In the sixth specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(F), judgment is made as to whether or not the sixth specific effect is executed for each setting value (“1” to “6”) and variable display result (big hit, loss). A value has been assigned.

For example, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the sixth specific performance at a rate of 20% regardless of the set value from "1" to "6". Further, for example, if the variable display result is a failure, it is determined to execute the sixth specific effect at a rate of 10% regardless of the set value from "1" to "6".

In this way, the sixth specific performance is a performance that suggests whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot, but does not suggest which setting value is set.

When it is determined to execute the sixth specific effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the sixth specific effect (Y in step 102IWS517, S518), and moves to step 102IWS522.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines not to execute the sixth specific performance, it performs a seventh specific performance execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute the seventh specific performance (step 102IWS519). Specifically, the seventh specific effect execution lottery is performed using the seventh specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(G).

FIG. 8-7(G) is an explanatory diagram showing the seventh specific performance execution lottery table. In the seventh specific effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7 (G), judgment is made as to whether or not the seventh specific effect is executed for each setting value (“1” to “6”) and variable display result (big hit, loss). A value has been assigned.

For example, it is decided that the seventh specific effect will be executed at a rate of 10%, regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss, or whether the set value is between "1" and "6". do.

In this way, the seventh specific performance is a performance that does not suggest whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot, nor which set value is set.

When it is determined to execute the seventh specific effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the seventh specific effect (Y in step 102IWS520, S521), and moves to step 102IWS522.

In step 102IWS522, the performance control CPU 120 performs a special performance execution lottery to determine whether or not to execute the special performance (step 102IWS522). Specifically, a special performance execution lottery is performed using the special performance execution lottery table shown in FIG. 8-7(H).

FIG. 8-7(H) is an explanatory diagram showing a special performance execution lottery table. In the special performance execution lottery table shown in Figure 8-7 (H), a judgment value for whether or not a special performance will be executed is assigned for each set value (“1” to “6”) and variable display result (jackpot, loss). ing.

For example, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to execute the special performance at a rate of 30% regardless of the set value from "1" to "6". Further, for example, if the variable display result is a failure, it is not decided to execute the special effect regardless of the set value from "1" to "6".

In this way, the special performance definitely informs that the variable display result is a jackpot, but does not suggest which set value is set.

When it is determined to execute the special performance, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of the special performance (Y in step 102IWS523, S524), and ends the preview performance setting process. When execution of the special effect is set in step 102IWS524, a process table corresponding to the execution of the special effect is selected in step 102IWS214, and the special effect is executed by performing the processing in steps 102IWS216 and S805. There is.

Although not shown, the performance control CPU 120, in the preview performance setting process, creates a preview performance (for example, a line preview performance, a step-up preview performance) to suggest whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the starting fluctuation. , mini character preview effect, group preview effect) can be set.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether execution of a specific performance is set (step 102IWS900), and if not set, proceeds to step 102IWS802. Specifically, it is determined whether execution of a specific effect is set by checking whether any of steps 102IWS503, S506, S509, S512, S515, S518, and S521 described above is being executed. If execution of a specific effect is set, it is determined whether or not it is a specific timing during the reach (step 102IWS901), and if it is a specific timing, roulette variation is started (step 102IWS902). Here, the specific timing is a predetermined execution start timing of a specific effect. A different timing may be determined for each variation pattern, or a constant timing may be determined regardless of the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 sets a valid period flag indicating that the valid period is such that the operation of the push button 31B by the player is valid when it is the predetermined valid period start timing (step 102 IWS904 ). Although not shown in the drawings, while the validity period flag is set, a promotion display is displayed to prompt the user to operate the push button 31B.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the validity period flag is set (step 102IWS905), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step 102IWS802. If the validity period flag is set, it is determined whether or not the operation on the push button 31B is accepted, and if it is accepted, the picture corresponding to the specific effect set (for the first specific effect, "7" ”, the second specific production is “BAR”, the third specific production is cherry, the fourth specific production is watermelon, the fifth specific production is “fierce heat”, and the sixth specific production is "Chance" and "Bell" for the seventh specific effect) are stopped and displayed (step 102IWS907), and the process moves to step 102IWS910.

In step 102IWS906, if the push button 31B is not operated, it is determined whether or not the validity period ends (step 102IWS908), and if the validity period ends, the bell is stopped and displayed (step 102IWS906). 102IWS909). Thereafter, the validity period flag is reset (step 102IWS910), and the process moves to step 102IWS802.

In this way, even if the specific performance is started, if the player does not press the push button 31B during the validity period, the bell is stopped and displayed regardless of which specific performance is being executed. It is. In other words, even if the specific performance is started, if no operation is accepted during the validity period, neither the set value nor the reliability of the jackpot will be suggested.

In step 102IWS802, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 102IWS802), and when the process timer times out (step 102IWS803), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 102 IWS804). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 102IWS805).

The performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 102IWS806), and if the variable time timer has timed out (step 102IWS807), the value of the production control process flag is changed to special symbol per waiting processing (step S173). (Step 102 IWS808).

FIGS. 8-9 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of the image display device 5 in a specific effect. In the display example of the image display device 5 shown in FIGS. 8-9, a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner at approximately the center of the image display device 5, and a small pattern is displayed in a variable manner at the upper right. Then, the roulette image 102IW01 is displayed at the lower center of the image display device 5, and the active display is displayed directly above it. Furthermore, four pending displays are displayed on the left side of the roulette image 102IW01.

For example, the roulette image 102IW01 is stopped and displayed before the decorative pattern starts to change and becomes a reach (Figure 8-9 (A)), and the roulette image 102IW01 rotates at a specific timing after the reach occurs. will be displayed (Figure 8-9(B)). Then, the valid operation period starts and the message "Press the button" is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B (FIG. 8-9(C)).

After that, when a pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected, if the specific performance being executed is the first specific performance, "7" is stopped and displayed (Figure 8-9 (D1)), and if the specific performance being executed is the second specific performance, "7" is stopped and displayed. "BAR" is stopped and displayed (Figure 8-9 (D2)), a cherry is stopped and displayed if it is the third specific effect (Figure 8-9 (D3)), and a watermelon is stopped and displayed if it is the fourth specific effect. (Figure 8-9 (D4)), if it is the 5th specific performance, "Very hot" is stopped and displayed (Figure 8-9 (D5)), and if it is the 6th specific performance, "Chance" is stopped and displayed. (FIG. 8-9 (D6)), and if it is the seventh specific performance, the bell is stopped and displayed (FIG. 8-9 (D7)).

Further, if the pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected, the bell is stopped and displayed (FIG. 8-9 (D7)).

As explained above, according to the present feature section 102IW, the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of different advantages for the player. A setting means (in this example, a setting confirmation process and a setting confirmation process when the power is turned on in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of the setting values (in this example, the setting values ``1'' to ``6'') A part that executes setting change processing, confirms the current setting value, and changes the setting value) and a specific effect that can execute specific effects (in this example, specific effects of the first to seventh aspects) The specific effect execution means includes a specific mode (in this example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 102IWS503, S506, S509, S512, S515, S518, S521, and S907). , the third aspect, and the fourth aspect) and a special aspect (in this example, the first aspect) different from the specific aspect. In this example, the second setting value (in this example, the setting value "6") is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value when the setting value "1" is set and the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state. is set and controlled in an advantageous state, the specific effect of the special mode is executed at a higher rate (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first specific effect shown in FIG. 8-7(A) By using the lottery table to determine whether or not to execute the first specific effect, it is possible to win a jackpot with the set value "6" set than when the set value "1" is set. The first specific performance is executed at a higher rate in the case of a jackpot). Thereby, the player's interest can be increased in that the player pays attention to whether or not the specific performance is executed in a special manner.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 discloses that the device is configured such that it can be set to any one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and that an advantageous state is controlled based on the set value. As a pachinko game machine configured to be able to execute, based on the setting value, a performance suggesting the setting value is performed by displaying three types of performance patterns corresponding to three types of characters: giraffe, elephant, and lion. Although gaming machines are described, in such gaming machines, the effects that suggest setting values are not sufficiently interesting. Therefore, by adopting the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to improve interest in that the player pays attention to whether or not the specific performance is executed in a special manner.

Although it has been explained that the "specific mode" is a mode that corresponds to a setting suggestion (the third mode and fourth mode that suggests the setting value that has been set), it is not limited to this. It may be a mode that does not correspond. For example, the mode may be such that only the reliability of the jackpot is suggested, or the mode may be such that neither the set value nor the reliability of the jackpot is suggested.

Although the specific effect of the first mode, which can be selected only in the case of a jackpot, has been described as a configuration that can be executed as a specific effect of the "special mode," it is not limited to this, and can be selected even in the case of a loss. It may be possible to execute the specific presentation of the mode as a specific presentation of the “special mode”.

In addition, although the specific performance of the first mode, which can be selected only in the case of a probability-variable jackpot, has been described as a configuration that can be executed as a specific production of the "special mode," it is not limited to this, and can be selected regardless of the type of jackpot. It may be possible to execute the specific presentation of the mode as a specific presentation of the “special mode”.

Note that in this feature section 102IW, it is possible to perform a performance in which a roulette image is rotated and a pattern is displayed in a stopped state as a specific performance, but the specific form of the specific performance is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to execute a performance that gives points as a specific performance, and the content of suggestions may differ depending on the given score. Further, the assigned scores may be added up, and the value of the addition result may indicate a setting value or reliability of a jackpot. For example, if the value of the addition result is a specific value (for example, 1000 points), it may be determined that the set value "6" is set.

Further, it may be possible to accumulate and store a history of the specific effects that have been executed (pictures that have been stopped and displayed), and to display this history based on the player's actions. Thereby, it is possible to confirm later which aspect of the specific performance has been executed.

Furthermore, the reliability of the setting value and the jackpot may be suggested by the order of appearance of the symbols that are stopped and displayed as a specific effect in the feature section 102IW. For example, when the specific performance of the fourth aspect is executed after the specific performance of the third aspect, it may be determined that a setting value advantageous to the player is likely to be set. Further, for example, when the specific effect of the fifth aspect is executed after the specific effect of the fifth aspect, the ratio of controlling to an advantageous state may be high.

In addition, in this feature section 102IW, it is possible to execute a performance in which a roulette image imitating one reel is rotated and displayed as a specific performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a roulette image imitating three reels can be executed. The specific effect may include rotating an image and displaying the same pattern in a stopped state. In that case, it is possible to perform a specific effect where the three reels do not have the same pattern (for example, a reach state where the same pattern appears on the left and right reels, but a false pattern where different patterns are stopped and displayed on the middle reel). It may be a thing.

Furthermore, in a specific performance in which three reels are displayed rotating as a roulette image, each reel may be stopped and displayed based on operations on different operating means. For example, in a gaming machine that is equipped with a left button, middle button, and right button that can be operated by the player, the left reel stops and displays when the left button is pressed, and the right reel stops and displays when the right button is pressed. The reels may be displayed in a stopped state, and the middle reel may be displayed in a stopped state based on pressing the middle button. In that case, whether or not the aligned symbols are stopped and displayed may be different depending on the order in which they are pressed. For example, the same pattern may be stopped and displayed only when the left button, middle button, and right button are pressed in this order. Further, the player may be informed in advance of the order in which the symbols are pressed in order to stop displaying the matching symbols. Further, the set value and the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested based on the order of pressing necessary for the matching symbols to be stopped and displayed. For example, the required pressing order is a first order of left button, middle button, right button, and a second order of right button, middle button, left button, and setting values are set to be advantageous for the player. If the game is controlled by a jackpot, the second order may be determined rather than the first order.

Further, as explained above, according to the present feature section 102IW, the gaming machine is capable of being controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and has different degrees of advantageous to the player. A setting means (in this example, a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (in this example, setting values "1" to "6") when the power is turned on in the game control microcomputer 100) The part that executes processing and setting change processing, confirms the current setting value, and changes the setting value) and the specific effect (in this example, the specific effect of the first to seventh aspects) can be executed. Specific performance execution means (in this example, the part in the performance control CPU 120 that executes steps 102IWS503, S506, S509, S512, S515, S518, S521, and S907) and a plurality of settings when controlled to an advantageous state. Special effect execution means that can execute a special effect different from the specific effect (special effect in this example) at a common ratio regardless of which set value is set In this example, effect control (a part of the CPU 120 for executing steps 102IWS524 and S805), and the specific performance execution means is configured to provide a player with a higher priority than the first set value than when the first set value is set and controlled to be in an advantageous state. When the second setting value that is advantageous for By determining whether or not to execute the first specific effect using the 1 specific effect execution lottery table, the set value "6" is set more than the case where the jackpot is achieved with the set value "1" set. (The first specific performance is executed at a higher rate when the player hits the jackpot in a state where the player is playing the game). This increases the variety of performances that correspond to the control of advantageous states, and adds an element for the player to guess the set value, making it possible to improve the game's interest.

For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-106796 discloses a gaming machine that can perform performances corresponding to control of advantageous states, and is capable of achieving jackpots by performing predetermined performances at multiple timings in fluctuations that lead to jackpot gaming states. Although a gaming machine has been described that notifies players of what will happen, such gaming machines have not been sufficiently interesting in terms of effects that correspond to the control of advantageous states. Therefore, by adopting the above-mentioned configuration, the variety of effects corresponding to the control of the advantageous state is increased, and an element for the player to guess the set value is added, so that the interest can be improved.

Note that in this feature section 102IW, it is possible to perform a special effect in which the special effect LED emits rainbow-colored light, but the specific mode of the special effect is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to perform a special performance using any of the performance members such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, other light-emitting members, movable objects, ventilation members, vibration members, and heat-generating members.

In addition, the special performance is a performance that notifies the control to a jackpot gaming state, and the specific performance is a performance that can suggest the reliability of controlling to a jackpot gaming state, so in the fluctuation of controlling to a jackpot gaming state, If, after executing the special performance, a specific performance indicating the reliability of controlling to a jackpot game state is performed, the performance effect of the specific performance will be reduced. Therefore, the execution timing of the special performance may be later than the execution timing of the specific performance.

In addition, even if it is possible to notify the mode of a specific effect (stop displaying the symbols on the roulette image) at a later timing than the timing at which the special effect can be executed, the reliability of the jackpot due to fluctuations in the execution of the special effect may be affected. To prevent a reduction in the performance effect by executing a specific performance that suggests a set value (including a format that also suggests the reliability of a jackpot) instead of a specific performance that suggests only the degree of winning. You can also use it as For example, it is decided whether or not to execute a special performance earlier than selecting the performance mode of a specific performance, and when executing the special performance, it is possible to change the mode from a mode that only suggests the confidence level for a jackpot to a mode that does not indicate the setting value. If you select one of these modes and do not perform a special performance, you may select one of the modes that only suggests the reliability of the jackpot and includes the mode that suggests a set value. In addition, even if whether or not to execute a special performance and the performance mode of a specific performance are determined independently, when the special performance is executed, the performance mode of the specific performance only indicates the reliability of the jackpot. It is also possible to switch from a mode in which a setting value is suggested (including a mode in which a reliability level for a jackpot is also suggested).

In addition, in this feature section 102IW, the specific performance execution means corresponds to the control of the advantageous state and has a preview mode (in this example, the fifth mode and the sixth mode) that does not correspond to the setting suggestion regarding the setting means, and a notice mode of the advantageous state. It is possible to perform specific performances in a plurality of performance modes including suggestion modes (in this example, third mode and fourth mode) that do not correspond to control but correspond to setting suggestions regarding the setting means. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

In addition, this feature section 102IW includes a variable display execution means (in this example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S110 to S113) capable of executing a variable display, and a reach effect during the variable display. possible reach effect execution means (in this example, the part in the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 102IWS805 when the fluctuation pattern is one of Pt13, Pt15, Pt21, Pt22), and the specific effect execution means , it is possible to execute a specific effect during the execution of the ready-to-reach effect (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 is able to execute the specific effect during the ready-to-reach effect (see FIGS. 8-9)). Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

In addition, the present feature section 102IW includes a variable display execution means that can execute a variable display, a reach effect execution means that can execute a reach effect during the variable display, and a specific effect execution means that allows the user to perform a game while executing the reach effect. It is possible to execute a specific performance in a special mode based on the user's actions (in this example, the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 102IWS906 to S909). Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

In addition, in this feature part 102IW, if no operation is detected on the push button 31B during the valid operation period, the same behavior as the seventh specific performance is shown, which does not suggest either the set value or the reliability of the jackpot. (The bell is stopped and displayed), but the invention is not limited to this, and a common picture is stopped and displayed regardless of whether or not an operation on the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (specifically, the bell is stopped and displayed). (If the result in step 102IWS908 is Y, the process may proceed to step 102IWS907).

In addition, the present feature section 102IW is a gaming machine that can be controlled into a plurality of types of advantageous states with different advantageous degrees (in this example, a probability variable jackpot and a normal jackpot), and the specific performance execution means is configured to control an advantageous state with a high advantageous degree. (In this example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the first specific performance only in the case of a probability-variable jackpot (FIG. 8-7(A) Reference)) As a result, it is suggested that a set value with a high degree of advantage is set when the game is controlled to an advantageous state with a high degree of advantage, so that the interest can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 102IW, as "multiple types of advantageous states with different advantageous degrees", it is possible to control the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, which differ in whether or not they shift to a probability variable state, but this is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, a long-term jackpot in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled for a long period of time and a short-term jackpot in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled for a short period of time may be implemented as "multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage". . Here, the "period for controlling the jackpot gaming state" is a concept that includes both the total opening period during which the jackpot opening is opened and the number of times the jackpot opening is opened. That is, a 10R jackpot is executed as a long-term jackpot in which the jackpot opening period per round is 20 seconds, and a 10R jackpot in which the jackpot opening period per round is 1 second is executed as a short-term jackpot. It may be possible. Alternatively, a 10R jackpot may be executed as a long-term jackpot, and a 2R jackpot may be executed as a short-term jackpot.

In addition, in gaming machines that shift to a special gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, there are multiple types of jackpots with different periods of shifting to the special gaming state, and the period of shifting to the special gaming state is long. A jackpot and a jackpot with a short transition period to the special gaming state may be implemented as "multiple types of advantageous states with different advantages." Examples of special gaming states include, for example, a high probability state in which the jackpot is more likely to occur than in the normal state, a time-saving state in which changes in special symbols are executed more frequently than in the normal state, and a small-hit gaming state that is controlled to be more likely than the normal state. There are conditions such as easy KT.

Further, in the present feature section 102IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect that targets the variable display being executed as a preview target, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific performance execution means may be capable of executing a specific performance that targets variable displays that have not yet been started. Specifically, a look-ahead preview performance (a performance that targets an unstarted variation that has not yet started and is started in a variation before the unstarted variation) may be executable as a specific performance; It may also be possible to execute a pending continuous performance (a performance that is started in a jackpot game state that is controlled before the unstarted fluctuation, with the unstarted fluctuation that has not yet started as a notice target) as a specific performance. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific performance.

Further, in the present feature section 102IW, it is possible to perform a specific performance in a special mode when the control is made to be in an advantageous state with a high degree of advantage, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, conversely, the specific performance execution means may be capable of executing a specific performance in a special mode when controlled to an advantageous state with a low advantage. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 may be capable of controlling a normal jackpot and a variable probability jackpot, and may be able to execute the first specific performance only when a normal jackpot occurs. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to being controlled to an advantageous state with a low advantage, and it is also possible to stimulate the player's desire to continue playing the game.

In addition, in this feature section 102IW, whether or not to execute each specific effect is determined by a different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when determining whether to execute a specific effect and executing it, Alternatively, a lottery may be held to select the performance mode of the specific performance from any of the first to seventh modes.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment)

Next, the feature section 207SG of this embodiment will be explained.

The main board 11 in the feature section 207SG is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in an openable board case. The main board 11 includes a lock switch for switching to a setting value changing state in which the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and a lock switch for changing setting values such as jackpot winning probability (ball payout rate) in the setting value changing state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for the game machine, and an opening sensor that detects opening of the gaming machine frame are provided.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and the like is arranged in the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and placed on the top of the board case. That is, the display monitor is placed in front of the main board 11 in the board case when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame is not open, so the front when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the gaming board when the gaming machine frame is open. , which is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main processing (see FIG. 3), the game control microcomputer 100 of the feature section 207SG determines whether the RAM clear flag indicating that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started with the clear switch being operated is set. For example, a setting value change process is performed to change the set setting value.

In the setting value change process, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value 1 larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor to a predetermined address in the RAM 102 based on the reception of the operation to the setting changeover switch. It is possible to repeatedly perform the process of storing data in a file. Note that if the set value displayed on the display monitor is "6", "1" may be stored at a predetermined address in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

In this way, the game control microcomputer 100 in the feature section 207SG has at least a plurality of setting values including advantageous setting values and disadvantageous setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player). It can be set to any value from 1, which is the setting value, to 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing (S110), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the random number value for jackpot determination generated by the random number circuit 104 and the jackpot determination value corresponding to the set value (in the set value). Based on the corresponding display result determination table (determination value corresponding to FIG. 9-1 to FIG. 9-6), it is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state. Then, similarly to the processing in steps S114 to S117, when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the control is carried out to the jackpot gaming state.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-10, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-1(A), and the second special figure display result shown in FIG. 9-1(B). Judgment table (set value 2), first special figure display result judgment table shown in Figure 9-2 (A) (set value 2), second special figure display result judgment table shown in Figure 9-2 (B) (setting value 2), the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in Figure 9-3 (A) (setting value 3), the display result judgment table for the second special figure (setting value) shown in Figure 9-3 (B) value 3), the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in Figure 9-4(A) (setting value 4), the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in Figure 9-4(B) (setting value 4). ), the display result determination table for the first special figure (setting value 5) shown in FIG. 9-5(A), the display result determination table for the second special figure (setting value 5) shown in FIG. 9-5(B), Display result determination table for the first special figure (setting value 6) shown in Figure 9-6(A), display result determination table for the second special figure (setting value 6) shown in Figure 9-6(B), jackpot type In addition to the determination table (for the first special symbol), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table, and the regular pattern display result determination table ( (not shown), a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), etc.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value is that the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the value for the gaming parlor side. Become.

FIGS. 9-1(A) to 9-6(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each setting value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as display result determination tables, but the present invention is not limited to this. , a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-1(B), in the second special pattern display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the variable special pattern is the second special pattern, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 9-2 (B), in the second special pattern display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the variable special pattern is the second special pattern, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 9-3 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special symbol (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 9-4 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special symbol (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the winning judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-5(A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 5 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-5(B), in the second special pattern display result determination table (setting value 5) used when the setting value is 5 and the variable special pattern is the second special pattern, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-6(A), in the display result determination table for the first special symbol (setting value 6) used when the setting value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,094 are assigned to "big hits," and the rest of the numerical ranges are assigned to "misses." In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-6(B), in the display result determination table for the second special symbol (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game state When is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are the values. The numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "big hits", the numbers 32,767 to 33,421 are assigned to "small hits", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, if the setting value is 1, it is 1/300, if the setting value is 2, it is 1/280, if the setting value is 3, it is 1/260, When the value is 4, it is 1/240, when the set value is 5, it is 1/220, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/200). Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, and when the setting value is 3, it is 1/200, and when the setting value is 3, it is 1/200. 160, 1/140 if the setting value is 4, 1/120 if the setting value is 5, 1/100 if the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of determining that the control is to be set to a jackpot gaming state is determined compared to when the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the value becomes high.

In addition, in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-6, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state relative to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state is adjusted according to each setting value. Different (For example, if the setting value is 1, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is 1.5 times the jackpot probability in the normal state or time-saving state, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier is 1.5 times the jackpot probability in the normal state or time-saving state.) The magnification of the jackpot probability in the state is approximately 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is 1.625 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ).

In addition, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, Figure 9-1 (A), Figure 9-2 (A), Figure 9-3 (A), Figure 9-4 (A), Figure 9-5 (A), Figure 9-6 ( As shown in A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined by the first feature, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same value, different from those in the graphical display result judgment table. Specifically, Figure 9-1 (B), Figure 9-2 (B), Figure 9-3 (B), Figure 9-4 (B), Figure 9-5 (B), Figure 9-6 ( As shown in B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. It is set to 1/100.

Note that the feature section 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and control to a small win game state is the same regardless of the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Furthermore, the feature section 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small hit" and is controlled to a small win gaming state according to the variable special figure is different. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, if we focus on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit" and "small win" in each display result judgment table, we can see that the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, as shown in Figure 9-7. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the case, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values to determine a jackpot regardless of the set value. .

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33094, with 32767 as the standard value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-8, in the first special figure display result judgment table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the winning judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 207SG of the present embodiment, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the set value is 1, it can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33094. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As shown in Figure 9-9, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal or time saving, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the winning determination values is the same regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the characteristic section 207SG of this embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-10, in the second special figure display result judgment table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the winning judgment values is set regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 207SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment values that do not fall within the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10, in each display result determination table, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the standard regardless of the gaming state and setting value. As such, the judgment value included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range is the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and regardless of the gaming state and setting value, the judgment value is determined as the jackpot judgment value. The variable display result is determined using the determination value included in the numerical range of continuous 1 (common numerical range) based on the value 32767 as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result judgment tables, if the variable special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the gaming state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure is different). The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, while the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is approximately 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each gaming state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot gaming state is determined is the highest. The judgment value is assigned such that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled (Jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>Setting value 4>Setting value 3>Setting value 2>Setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot). It is decided that A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. In other words, the winning of the jackpot and small winning is determined with the probability according to the set value. Note that the "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-1(A) to 9-6(B) indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small hit. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether to use the jackpot symbol or not. In addition, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to control to a small winning gaming state, but stopping the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small winning symbol.

In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the display result determination table Regardless of the hit determination value, the range from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1 is one of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), then from 1238, depending on each setting value, The range up to this value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. In other words, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are determined by using the hit determination value of 1020 as the jackpot reference value. Since it is set to be a continuous numerical value range, when determining whether or not it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, the value of the random value MR1 is set from 1020 to a non-common numerical range according to each setting value. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

In particular, in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set at one location within the range of 0 to 65535 with 1020 as the reference value, so there are multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value. Compared to the case where the random value MR1 is a value within the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value (or not), it is not necessary to perform the judgment multiple times (whether or not to control to jackpot gaming state). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

In addition, as shown in Figures 9-7 to 9-10, in the display result determination table, the above-mentioned hit determination value is With 1020 as the jackpot reference value, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges, so when determining whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. is whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or time saving state, and whether the value of the random numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the variable state. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 9-7 to 9-10, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value is determined depending on whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values included in the range is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, while the second special figure display result (The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice as many.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value). It is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to a small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 must be within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the variable special figure. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not it is within the range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the small winning gaming state.

As shown in Figures 9-7 to 9-10, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is determined by the numerical range of the small hit determination value for the pachinko game machine 1, regardless of the setting value set for the pachinko game machine 1. Since it is set in a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) that is different from the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value when the set value is 6, it is determined whether the jackpot gaming state is controlled or not. When making this determination, it is only necessary to determine whether the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value, and the game is controlled to a small winning gaming state. When determining whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the fluctuating special symbol, the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state and the processing load of determining whether to control to the small winning gaming state.

In addition, in the feature section 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10, if the variable special symbols are the same, the small hit will occur regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the numerical range of the judgment value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 Accordingly, the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control the small winning gaming state can be reduced. When setting the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102, the process for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is made common. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

In addition, as shown in Figures 9-7 to 9-10, if the pachinko game machine 1 is set to 1 (the setting value with the lowest jackpot probability), the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, so if 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is necessary to judge whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. Therefore, the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state can be reduced.

In addition, in the feature section 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10, a form is exemplified in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value of the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of jackpot determination values. That is, in the feature section 207SG of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of jackpot determination values may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of jackpot determination values.

In addition, in the feature section 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-10, a form is exemplified in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value of the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 16TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 16TM will be explained. FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of a hold display and an active display in this embodiment. The pending display is display information corresponding to the variable display of special symbols that have not been executed, and the active display is display information that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbols that are being executed. In this embodiment, a first pending display area 16TM011 in which a first pending storage number (first pending display 16TM001 of 0 to 4) is displayed is provided at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. An active display area 16TM013 in which an active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed is provided at the lower center of the screen of No. 5.

In addition, when the gaming state is controlled to a low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), a special effect area 16TM035 provided at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5 and below the active display 16TM003 has a mini Slot 16TM030 is displayed. In this example, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, it appears to the player as if the mini-slot 16TM030 is a pedestal for the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at a position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily understand that the mini-slot 16TM030 will perform an effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. Can be done.

In this embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display of special symbols is being executed (whether or not the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed) and regardless of the number of pending memories. This is great information.

When the first pending memory number is not 0, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pending display 16TM001 in the first pending display area 16TM011 in a number corresponding to the first pending memory number. In other words, the first pending display 16TM001 indicates that the starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting prize opening) has been met, but the starting condition (for example, the variable display of special symbols has not been executed, and the control is in a jackpot gaming state). information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) in which the following conditions are not satisfied: It is. If a plurality of first pending displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first pending display area 16TM011, the first pending displays 16TM001 correspond to the first pending displays 16TM001 in the order closest to the active display area 16TM013 (from the right as seen from the player). The condition for starting the variable display is satisfied.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of decorative symbols is being executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 indicates that after the starting condition (for example, winning in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole) is satisfied, the starting condition (for example, the variable display of special symbols is not being executed, and the jackpot game is not executed). This information corresponds to the variable display of special symbols (and the variable display of decorative symbols) in which the state is not controlled and the number of pending memories is not 0.

In this embodiment, as described above, in response to the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed. As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the area in the upper center of the image display device 5, where the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable and static manner, is a symbol display area 5L, a symbol display area 5C, It is set as a symbol display area 5R.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the special symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 and is smaller than the decorative symbol, and is displayed in a variable manner. A symbol indicating whether or not the special symbol is displayed and the display result of the special symbol is called a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stationary display of the small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stationary display of the special symbols. Then, from the left, the area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, where the small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed in a variable and static manner, is the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area. 5r. The display areas of the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are smaller than those of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern is lower than that of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), in this embodiment, when the low probability low base state (normal state) is controlled, the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first variable mini-slot display to be described later, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A2), mini-slots of "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "7", and "Blank" are displayed. Symbols are displayed variably, and in the second mini-slot variable display described later, as shown in Figure 10-1 (B2), symbols with no warning characters displayed ("no display") and jackpot expectations are displayed. The mini-slot symbols ``CHANCE'', ``Gekonetsu'', and ``FEVER'', which are symbols consisting of suggestive warning characters, are variably displayed.

(First mini-slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A1), in this embodiment, when controlled to a low-accuracy low base state (normal state), the variable display of special symbols (variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols) Each time the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (areas corresponding to the three reels in the slot machine) are ), it is possible to execute a first mini-slot variable display in which mini-slot symbols are displayed variably (for example, vertically scrolled or updated). In the first mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are each displayed in one row (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. In addition, in the following explanation, when it is simply referred to as a "variable display", it refers to a variable display of a special symbol, a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol, or a variable display of a small symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (A2), in each of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (3 reels), "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", A plurality of mutually distinguishable types of symbols such as "cherry", "7", and "blank (in this example, a horizontal linear object (-))" are variably displayed in a predetermined order.

Then, when the mini-slot symbols stop in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, and a combination of symbols called an established combination is completed, the winning combination is determined to be established. The winning combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The established combinations in this embodiment are combinations of the same symbols and combinations that include different symbols. In addition, in the case of a combination of different symbols, it becomes a "miss" as a winning combination.

In this embodiment, a combination of the same symbols is established. For example, when the combination of the same symbols [BELL], [BELL], and [BELL] are aligned in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the winning combination of "BELL" is established. Similarly, when the combination of the same symbols [Watermelon], [Watermelon], [Watermelon] comes together, the winning combination becomes "Watermelon", and when the combination of the same symbols [Cherry], [Cherry], [Cherry] comes together, it becomes "Watermelon". When the combination of the same symbols [7], [7], and [7] is completed, the winning combination of "7" is established. However, if the same symbol combinations of [Blank], [Blank], and [Blank] are present in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, it will be handled in the same way as when the established combination is a "lost" combination.

(Second mini-slot variable display)
As shown in FIG. 10-1 (B1), in this embodiment, after the first mini-slot variable display is executed (after any of the above-mentioned successful combinations is established), the mini-slot is not divided into multiple slots. In the single mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (area corresponding to one reel), it is possible to execute a second mini-slot variable display in which mini-slot symbols are displayed variably (for example, by vertically scrolling or updating). be. In the second mini-slot variable display, mini-slot symbols are displayed in one row (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Here, as shown in Figure 10-1 (B2), in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel), mutually distinguishable characters such as "No display", "CHANCE", "Very hot", and "FEVER" are displayed. A plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined order. In this embodiment, the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, that is, the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed) It is suggested that this will be a "jackpot".

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), the number of variable displays executed after the gaming state is controlled to the low-probability, low-base state (normal state) is counted. A variation number display 16TM040 indicating the value of the variation number counter is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. The value indicated by the number of fluctuation display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of times the fluctuation display has been executed in the normal state. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-1 (A1) and (B1), "125" is displayed as the variation number display 16TM040, and the variation display has already been executed 124 times since the gaming state shifted to the normal state. This shows a state where the 125th variable display is currently being executed.

Here, the variation number display 16TM040 changes from the normal mode (for example, white mode) to a setting suggestion mode different from the normal mode ( For example, the color changes to a purple color).

Note that the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 can be changed from a normal mode (for example, a white mode) to an expectation that is different from either the normal mode or the above-mentioned setting suggestion mode (for example, a purple mode) based on the display result of the executed variation display. It is also possible to perform a preview effect (for example, referred to as a second expectation level preview effect) that changes the degree of expectation notice mode (for example, a red mode). However, in the same variable display, both the second setting suggestion effect and the second expectation level preview effect are not executed, and if it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect and the second expectation level preview effect are not executed in the same variable display. It is assumed that the anticipation level preview performance is not performed. That is, the second setting suggestion performance is executed with priority over the second expectation level preview performance.

Although not shown, the production control CPU 120 sets one set based on the occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting prize opening in the advance notice setting process (step S161) of the production control process shown in FIG. When a new command is received at the time of a starting prize winning (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first pending memory number addition designation command), the display mode of the active display and pending display corresponding to the starting winning is changed. Performs processing to determine change patterns.

For example, if one set of starting winning commands is newly received, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (normal mode, blue mode, or red mode) of the active display. Note that the final display mode of the active display is the final display color of the active display that is determined at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, after the active display changes to the final display color, a preview character may be displayed superimposed on the active display in response to execution of an expectation preview effect, which will be described later. That is, from the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of starting winning, there is a possibility that the mode of the active display further changes based on the effect determination processing at the start of variation.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the active display (a combination of the change timing of the active display and the transition of the change mode), as well as the first change performance (when changing the display mode of the active display (execution of the active change performance) (if the display mode of the active display is changed), and if the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), whether or not the display mode of the active display is executed (effects that suggest that the display mode of the active display may be changed) and the number of execution times Determine. This first change effect includes a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed, and the failure mode is changed. When the first change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed. Further, the first change performance is a performance in which a character acts on the active display. When the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the character acts on the active display to change the display mode of the active display, and when the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the character Although it acts on the active display, it does not change the display mode of the active display.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines a change pattern of the hold display (a combination of a change timing of the hold display and a transition of the change mode).

(Production decision processing at the start of variable display)
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result specification command that specifies a display result, a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern, and a pending memory number subtraction specification command (first pending memory number subtraction specification). command or second pending storage number subtraction designation command) to the production control CPU 120.

When the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started, the performance control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number subtraction designation command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the number of pending memories has been subtracted. Memory count subtraction designation command or second pending memory count subtraction designation command), display result designation command that specifies the display result (jackpot or miss, jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and special symbol fluctuation time and production content ( Based on receiving a set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100, such as a variation pattern designation command that specifies the reach (reach, pseudo-run, etc.), the special symbol variation display is executed, and the special symbol It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and performance contents (reach, pseudo-connection, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the display result is determined, the production control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and receives the special symbol (the first special symbol). It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of variation. The performance control CPU 120 executes the variation start time performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-2 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the performance control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, upon receiving the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. A production control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a production) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern is set based on the specified variation pattern. The effect to be executed during the variable display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 10-2.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a first setting suggestion performance, which will be described later, based on a first setting suggestion performance execution/nonexecution determination table (see FIG. 10-3 (G)) (step S16TM2000). .

Here, in the present embodiment, in the low-accuracy, low-base state, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect as the effect suggesting the currently set setting value. This first setting suggestion effect causes the mini-slot symbol combinations of [Bell], [Bell], and [Bell] to be stopped and displayed as the same symbol combination in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030. This is a production that establishes the role of ``Bell.'' That is, based on the mini-slot symbol combinations of [BELL], [BELL], and [BELL] being stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player sets the set value. It is recognized that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting .

As shown in the table of FIG. 10-3 (G), a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is assigned according to the currently set setting value. When the set value is "1", the performance control CPU 120 determines not to perform the first setting suggestion performance at a rate of 97%, and determines to execute it at a rate of 3%. Further, when the setting value is "2", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect 96% of the time, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect 4% of the time. Further, when the setting value is "3", it is decided not to perform the first setting suggestion effect 95% of the time, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect 5% of the time. Further, when the setting value is "4", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect 94% of the time, and it is decided to execute it 6% of the time. Further, when the setting value is "5", it is decided not to perform the first setting suggestion effect 93% of the time, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect 7% of the time. Further, when the setting value is "6", it is decided not to perform the first setting suggestion effect 92% of the time, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect 8% of the time.

As shown in Figure 10-3 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the setting value, and the higher the setting value, the higher the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Become. In this embodiment, since the variation start effect determination process is executed each time a variable display is executed, it is determined whether or not to perform the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display described above is set to be [Bell] or "lost". As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed every time the variable display is executed, and also The user is also interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to guess the set value for each variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, when the performance control CPU 120 determines to execute the first setting suggestion performance (YES in step S16TM2010), the performance control CPU 120 selects whether or not to execute the expectation level preview performance when executing the first setting suggestion performance. It is determined based on the execution/non-execution determination table 1 (see FIGS. 10-3 (H1) and (H2)) of the expectation level preview performance (step S16TM2020). On the other hand, if it is determined not to perform the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the process moves to step S16TM2120, which will be described later.

FIG. 10-3 (H1) shows the execution rate of the expectation level preview effect when it has been decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "miss". In the table 1 for determining whether or not to execute the expectation level preview performance, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the expectation level preview performance is assigned to each of the variation patterns for failure. When the variation pattern is "unreachable" (variation time is 10 seconds), the performance control CPU 120 determines not to perform the expectation preview performance at a rate of 100%. Further, when the variation pattern is "Normal reach off" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation level preview effect at a rate of 100%. In addition, if the variation pattern is "Super Reach Off" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to perform the anticipation level preview effect at a rate of 60%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 40%. do.

FIG. 10-3 (H2) shows the execution rate of the expectation preview effect when it has been decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is a "jackpot". In the table 1 for determining whether or not to perform the expectation level preview performance, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the expectation level preview performance is assigned to each of the jackpot variation patterns. When the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), the performance control CPU 120 determines not to execute the expectation level preview performance at a rate of 100%. In addition, if the variation pattern is "Super Reach Jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to perform the anticipation level preview effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 80%. do.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3 (H1) and (H2), whether or not to perform the anticipation level preview effect is determined based on a variation pattern (variation time). In this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the variation pattern (variation time) is a non-reach error (10 seconds), a normal reach error (30 seconds), or a normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). seconds), it is decided not to perform the expectation level preview performance at a rate of 100%, and if the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is off the super reach (120 seconds), the expectation level preview performance is It has been decided to execute at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), it has been decided to execute the expectation preview performance at a rate of 80%.

If a variation pattern with a short variation time (non-reach miss (10 seconds), normal reach miss (30 seconds), normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion performance and the anticipation level preview performance A sufficient period of time has not been secured to carry out the production. Therefore, when a variable display based on a variation pattern with a short variation time is executed, although it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the expectation level preview effect is not executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed. There is.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern with a long variation time (super reach miss (120 seconds), super reach jackpot (120 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion performance and the anticipation level preview performance are performed. Sufficient period of time has been secured for implementation. Therefore, after executing the first setting suggestion effect, it is possible to execute the expectation level preview effect.

In this way, in this embodiment, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined based on the common table regardless of the variation time, and if the variation time is short, the variation time is long. In either case, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a common rate. On the other hand, the expectation level preview effect is executed at a higher rate when the variation time is long than when the variation time is short. In other words, when the fluctuation time of the executed fluctuating display is short, when the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display to be executed is longer than [the rate at which the expectation preview performance is executed after the first setting suggestion rendering is executed], the fluctuation time of the fluctuating display to be executed is longer. [The rate at which the expectation level preview performance is executed after the first setting suggestion performance is executed] is higher.

Next, when it is decided to execute the expectation preview performance (YES in step S16TM2030), the performance control CPU 120 displays the display result to be stopped and displayed in the second mini-slot variable display described above, and the second change. Whether or not to perform the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 10-3 (J)) (step S16TM2040). The second change effect is to change the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing a character icon based on the "character symbol as a display result stopped in the second mini-slot variable display" on the active display 16TM003. It is a performance that makes you feel. In this embodiment, the second change effect is executed except when the display result that is stopped in the second mini-slot variable display is a "no display" display result in which no text or symbols are displayed. Become. On the other hand, if it is determined not to perform the expectation preview effect (NO in step S16TM2030), the process moves to step S16TM2060, which will be described later.

FIG. 10-3 (J) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a character icon determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (J), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expectation level preview effect, the character symbol is displayed as a mini-slot as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display. It is possible to determine either "No display", which is a display result that is not displayed in the symbol display area 5LCR1, or "CHANCE", "Very hot", or "FEVER", which are character symbols, and each of these displays A judgment value is assigned to each result.

As shown in Figure 10-3 (J), if the display result of the fluctuation display is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "miss"), the fluctuation As the display result of the second mini-slot variable display executed in the display, "No display" is selected at a rate of 70%, "CHANCE" is selected at a rate of 25%, and "Very hot" is selected at a rate of 5%. is selected.

On the other hand, if the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" (that is, the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "jackpot"), the second mini-slot variable executed in the variable display As a display result, 22% of the time "No display" is selected, 35% of the time "CHANCE" is selected, 40% of the time "Very hot" is selected, and 3% of the time "CHANCE" is selected. "FEVER" is selected. Therefore, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display becomes "FEVER", the occurrence of a jackpot is confirmed.

As shown in Figure 10-3 (J), the display results of the second mini-slot variable display (variable display on 1 reel) are "No display" < "CHANCE" < "Very hot" < "FEVER" The expectation of hitting the jackpot increases in this order. Therefore, if any of the character patterns "CHANCE", "fierce heat", and "FEVER" stop (if the second change effect is executed afterwards), none of the character patterns will stop and be displayed. The probability of winning the jackpot is higher than when the result is "no display" (when the second change effect is not executed thereafter). In addition, since the expectation level of jackpot varies depending on the characters and symbols to be stopped, the player pays attention to the display result of the second mini-slot variable display.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed when the character symbol (any one of "CHANCE", "Fever", and "FEVER") stops as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display. A second change effect is executed. Specifically, when any of the characters and symbols "CHANCE", "Gekatsu", and "FEVER" are stopped and displayed in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel) of the minislot 16TM030, (i) The stopped and displayed character symbols move upward from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and act on the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 (see FIG. 10-7 (11)), (ii) The active display 16TM003 and the character icon based on the moved character pattern are displayed in a superimposed manner (see FIG. 10-7 (12)). This character icon is an icon indicating the same character as the character pattern that is the display result of the second mini-slot variable display. That is, an effect in which a character icon indicating the same character as the character pattern that is the display result is added to the active display 16TM003 is executed as the second change effect. On the other hand, if the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", the second change effect is not executed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects the successful role of the expectation level preview performance from the successful role determination table 1 of the expectation level preview performance (see FIG. 10-4 (K)), which is used when executing the first setting suggestion performance. (Step S16TM2050), and the process proceeds to Step S16TM2060.

FIG. 10-4(K) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the successful combination determination table 1 of the anticipation level preview performance. As shown in FIG. 10-4 (K), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the role of establishing the expectation level preview effect, more specifically, the expectation level The roles that establish the first mini-slot variable display executed in the preview performance (the same applies hereafter) are "miss", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", It is possible to determine any one of "Cherry (Freeze)," "Set of 7s," and "Set of 7s (Freeze)," and a determination value is assigned to each of these winning combinations.

In this embodiment, when a "miss" is selected as a winning combination for the anticipation level preview performance, mini-slot symbols of combinations including different symbols are stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. For example, when [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5C1, and [Bell] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5R1, the role of establishing the anticipation level preview effect is It becomes a “miss”.

In the present embodiment, when "Watermelon", "Cherry", and "Set of 7" are selected as the winning combinations for the anticipation level preview production, mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 display minislots with the same symbol combination. Stop and display the slot symbols. For example, if the combination of mini-slot symbols [Watermelon], [Watermelon], and [Watermelon] are stopped and displayed as the same symbol combination in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of the mini-slot symbols [Watermelon], [Watermelon], and [Watermelon] is stopped and displayed as a combination of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. becomes "watermelon".

In this embodiment, when "Watermelon (via replay)" and "Cherry (via replay)" are selected as the winning combinations for the expectation preview performance, the same symbols are displayed in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After the combinations of mini-slot symbols [Replay], [Replay], and [Replay] are stopped and displayed, the mini-slot symbols are changed again in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, and the mini-slot symbols are displayed. A combination of the same symbols in areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is a combination of the mini-slot symbols [Watermelon], [Watermelon], and [Watermelon], or a combination of the mini-slot symbols [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]. Stop display.

In the present embodiment, when "Cherry (Freeze)" or "Set of 7 (Freeze)" is selected as the winning combination for the anticipation level preview performance, the normal mode ( [Cherry], [Cherry], [Cherry] are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 after the mini-slot symbol is displayed in a freeze mode that is different from the top-to-down scroll display or update display). ] or the mini-slot symbol combinations [7], [7], [7] are stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the variable display of the freeze mode refers to the display of mini-slot symbols that scrolls from bottom to top or updates while reducing the visibility of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. It is a variable display.

As shown in Figure 10-4 (K), if the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (symbols with no characters displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed) case), the successful combination in the expectation level preview performance will be a "miss" at a rate of 100%.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANCE" (that is, the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is "CHANCE"), CHANCE), the successful role in the expectation preview performance is ``miss'' at a rate of 5%, ``watermelon'' at a rate of 45%, and ``watermelon (via replay)'' at a rate of 20%. 20% of the time it becomes "Cherry", 2% of the time it becomes "Cherry (via replay)", and 8% of the time it becomes "Cherry (freeze)".

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-4 (K), if the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "fierce heat" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is In the case of "Very Hot"), the established role in the expectation preview performance is "Watermelon" at a rate of 15%, "Watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 10%, and "Watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 40%. 10% of the time it becomes "Cherry (via replay)" and 25% of the time it becomes "Cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is "FEVER"). 70% of the time, and 30% of the time, the winning combination in the expectation preview production is "7 set" (freeze).

As shown in Figure 10-4 (K), when the winning combination is "miss", the stopping symbol is "no display" or "CHANCE", and when the winning combination is "watermelon" or "cherry", the stopping symbol ( When the character icon) becomes "CHANCE" or "fierce heat" and the winning combination is "set of 7", the stop symbol (character icon) becomes "FEVER". Also, when the winning combination is "miss", "No display" is more likely to be selected as the stopping symbol than "CHANCE", and when the winning winning combination is "watermelon", the stopping symbol (text icon) is "fiery heat". "CHANCE" is more likely to be selected than "CHANCE", and when the winning combination is "cherry", "fiery heat" is more likely to be selected as the stop symbol (character icon) than "CHANCE".

That is, regarding the stop symbols of the second mini-slot variable display, the expectation level to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state increases in the order of "no display" < "CHANCE" < "extreme heat" < "FEVER", and the first With regard to the winning combinations of the mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation to be controlled to a jackpot game state increases in the order of "Lose" < "Watermelon" < "Cherry" < "7". In addition, if "Set of 7" is selected as the winning combination for the first mini-slot variable display, the stopping symbol of the second mini-slot variable display will always be "FEVER", so "Set of 7" is guaranteed to be a jackpot. It is a performance of. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state can be varied depending on the winning combination made up of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-4(K), the winning combinations with variable display of the freeze mode are limited to "cherry (freeze)" and "set of 7 (freeze)". If "Cherry (Freeze)" is selected as the winning combination, the display result (character icon) will be "CHANCE" or "Very Hot", and if "Set of 7 (Freeze)" is selected as the winning combination. The preview text (text icon) is "FEVER". That is, when the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a frozen manner, a winning combination of "cherry" or higher ("cherry" or "set of 7") is determined, so the mini-slot symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a normal manner. The expectation level of being controlled into a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the game is played. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display mode of the mini-slot symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 determines not to execute the first setting suggestion performance (NO in step S16TM2010), the performance control CPU 120 selects whether or not to execute the expectation level preview performance when not executing the first setting suggestion performance. It is determined based on the execution/non-execution determination table 2 (see FIGS. 10-3 (I1) and (I2)) of the expectation level preview performance (step S16TM2120).

FIG. 10-3 (I1) shows the execution rate of the expectation level preview effect when it has been decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is "miss". In the table 2 for determining whether or not to perform the expectation level preview performance, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the expectation level preview performance is assigned to each of the variation patterns for failure. When the variation pattern is "unreachable" (variation time is 10 seconds), the performance control CPU 120 determines not to perform the expectation preview performance at a rate of 100%. In addition, if the variation pattern is "Normal reach off" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to perform the expectation notice performance 80% of the time, and it is decided to execute it 20% of the time. . In addition, if the variation pattern is "Super Reach Off" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to perform the anticipation level preview effect at a rate of 40%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 60%. do.

FIG. 10-3 (I2) shows the execution rate of the expectation preview effect when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is a "jackpot". In the table 2 for determining whether or not to perform the expectation level preview performance, a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the expectation level preview performance is assigned to each of the jackpot variation patterns. When the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), the performance control CPU 120 determines not to perform the expectation preview performance at a rate of 30%, and executes it at a rate of 70%. I decided to do so. In addition, if the variation pattern is "Super Reach Jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to perform the anticipation level preview effect at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 90%. do.

Here, in the examples of FIGS. 9 (H1) and (H2) in which it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, when the variation pattern of "normal reach" is selected, it is decided not to execute the expectation level preview effect. In the examples of FIGS. 9 (I1) and (I2) in which it was decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect ("no execution" is 100%), the variation pattern of "normal reach" was selected. In this case, there is a possibility that it will be decided to execute the anticipation level preview performance (“Execution” is 20% for “Normal reach miss” and 70% for “Normal reach jackpot”).

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9 (H1) and (H2) in which it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the percentage of execution of the expectation level preview effect when the "super reach" variation pattern is selected (" In the examples in Figure 9 (I1) and (I2), it was decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. When the variation pattern is selected, the probability of executing the anticipation level preview performance is higher (60% for "super reach miss" and 90% for "super reach jackpot"). In this way, in this embodiment, when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the expectation level preview effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. .

Next, when it is decided to execute the expectation preview performance (YES in step S16TM2130), the performance control CPU 120 displays the display result to be stopped and displayed in the second mini-slot variable display described above, and the second change. Whether or not to perform the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 10-3 (J)) (step S16TM2140). On the other hand, if it is determined not to perform the expectation preview effect (NO in step S16TM2130), the process moves to step S16TM2060, which will be described later.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects the successful role of the expectation level preview performance from the successful role determination table 2 of the expectation level preview performance to be used when the first setting suggestion performance is not executed (see FIG. 10-4 (L)). (Step S16TM2150), and the process proceeds to Step S16TM2060.

FIG. 10-4(L) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the successful combination determination table 2 of the anticipation level preview performance. As shown in FIG. 10-4 (L), in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the role of establishing the expectation level preview effect, more specifically, the expectation level The roles that establish the first mini-slot variable display executed in the preview performance (the same applies hereafter) are "miss", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", It is possible to determine any one of "Cherry (Freeze)," "Set of 7s," and "Set of 7s (Freeze)," and a determination value is assigned to each of these winning combinations.

As shown in Figure 10-4 (L), if the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (symbols with no characters displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed) case), the successful combination in the expectation level preview performance will be a "miss" at a rate of 100%.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (L), if the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANCE" (that is, the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is "CHANCE"), CHANCE), the successful role in the expectation preview performance will be "miss" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, and "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 50%. 2% of the time it becomes "Cherry", 18% of the time it becomes "Cherry (via replay)", and 10% of the time it becomes "Cherry (freeze)".

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-4 (L), if the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "Very Hot" (that is, the character symbol to be superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is In the case of "Very Hot"), the successful role in the expectation preview performance is "Watermelon" at a rate of 10%, "Watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 15%, and "Watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 10%. 38% of the time, it was ``Cherry (via replay)'', and 27% of the time, it was ``Cherry (freeze)''.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be displayed superimposed on the active display in the second change effect is "FEVER"). FEVER), the winning combination in the anticipation level preview performance is ``7 set'' at a rate of 30%, and ``7 set (freeze)'' at a 70% rate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first mini-slot in the expectation level preview performance is determined depending on whether it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. Although we have shown an example in which the winning combinations of the variable display (i.e., winning combinations other than "Bell") are determined based on different tables, it is not limited to this form, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion performance. The winning role of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation level preview performance (that is, the winning role other than "Bell") is the same in both the case where the first setting suggestion performance is decided not to be executed. may be determined based on the table. That is, while the execution or non-execution of the expectation level preview performance is determined at different rates in step S16TM2020 and step S16TM2120 (based on the execution/determination table for the execution/nonexecution of different expectation level preview performances), the execution or nonexecution of the expectation level preview performance is determined at different rates, while the common realization role is used in step S16TM2050 and step S16TM2150. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation preview performance may be determined based on the determination table.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low probability low base state (normal state), each time the variable display is executed, the first The mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, and the established combination becomes "Bell" or "Lose". Then, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) is finished, and during the variable display (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (expectation level preview effect is executed) and (ii) a case in which the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is not executed (a case in which the expectation preview performance is not executed).

Here, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (when the expectation level preview effect is executed), the realized role determined based on the established role determination table is realized. Later, a second mini-slot variable display (first time) is further executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. Then, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (a) a symbol that does not include characters ("no display"), or (b) a character symbol ("CHANCE", "fierce heat") , "FEVER") stops. (b) When the text pattern ("CHANCE", "Fever", "FEVER") stops, a second change effect is executed in which a text icon based on the text pattern is added to the active display. Become.

As described above, in the above embodiment, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) symbols that do not include characters ("no display") stop, that is, the second Even if a change effect is not executed, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is always executed before that, and the effect composition is such that the winning combination is always a "miss". . This is not limited to this, but when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) symbols that do not include characters ("no display") stop (when the second change effect is not executed) In addition, in (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) that is executed before that, it may be possible that a winning combination other than "lost" may be realized.

In addition, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) symbols that do not include letters ("no display") stop (when the second change effect is not executed), (i) The first mini-slot variable display (second time) itself may not be executed. That is, after the first mini-slot variable display (in the 3-reel system) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (in the 1-reel system), the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in the 1-reel system) The second mini-slot variable display (first time) may be executed.

Further, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), the character symbols (b) ("CHANCE", "Gekatsu", "FEVER") may always stop. That is, when the second mini-slot variable display (in the one-reel system) is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1, the second changing performance may be executed without fail. When such a performance configuration is adopted, (i) the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed before the second mini-slot variable display (first time). You may choose not to do this.

Next, if the value of the variation counter is 25×n (n is an integer) [a multiple of 25] (YES in step S16TM2060), the performance control CPU 120 executes a second setting suggestion performance to be described later. It is determined whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion performance based on the execution/non-execution determination table (see FIG. 10-4 (M)) (step S16TM2070), and the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the variation counter is not 25×n (n is an integer) (NO in step S16TM2060), the process is directly terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, when in the low-accuracy, low-base state, it is possible to execute the second setting suggestion effect as the effect suggesting the currently set setting value. This second setting suggestion effect changes the number of fluctuation display 16TM040, which is displayed in the normal mode (white mode in this example) at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, to a purple color at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol starts. It is a performance that changes the appearance. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is ended and the number of fluctuation display 16TM040 displayed in purple at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is changed to the normal mode. Return to

In FIG. 10-4(M), a determination value for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect is assigned according to the currently set setting value. When the set value is "1", the performance control CPU 120 determines not to perform the second setting suggestion performance at a rate of 90%, and determines to execute it at a rate of 10%. Further, when the setting value is "2", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect 88% of the time, and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect 12% of the time. Further, when the setting value is "3", it is determined not to perform the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 86%, and it is determined to be executed at a rate of 14%. Further, when the setting value is "4", it is determined not to perform the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 84%, and it is determined to be executed at a rate of 16%. Further, when the setting value is "5", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 82%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 18%. Further, when the setting value is "6", it is determined not to perform the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and it is determined to execute it at a rate of 20%.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is in the low-probability, low-base state, the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first setting suggestion performance, the second change performance, and the expectation level preview performance are executed. Although the example shown above is not limited to such a form, when the gaming state is any of the low probability high base state, the high probability high base state, or the high probability low base state, the image display device 5 displays a mini display. The slot 16TM030 may be displayed to execute any one of the first setting suggestion performance, the second change performance, or the expectation level preview performance.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is in the low-accuracy/low-base state, an example has been shown in which the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the second setting suggestion performance is executed. Regardless of the form, when the gaming state is any one of a low probability high base state, a high probability high base state, or a high probability low base state, the number of fluctuation display 16TM040 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second A setting suggestion effect may also be executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, after determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, it is determined in step S16TM2020 or step S16TM2120 whether or not to execute the expectation level preview effect, and further, in step S16TM2050 or step S16TM2150. The role that will lead to the anticipated preview performance has been decided. When determining the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (G), it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect based on the currently set setting values. In this embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the variation pattern (variation time).

In addition, when executing the first setting suggestion effect (YES in step S16TM2010) and executing the expectation level preview effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (H1) and (H2), the variation pattern (variation time) Based on this, it is determined whether or not to perform the anticipation level preview performance. If the variation pattern (variation time) is a non-reach error (10 seconds), a normal reach error (30 seconds), or a normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), it is determined that the expectation level preview performance will not be executed at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, if the variation pattern (variation time) is a super reach miss (120 seconds), it is decided to "execute the anticipation level preview effect" at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), At a rate of 80%, it is determined that the anticipation level preview effect will be executed.

In this way, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the variation pattern (variation time), and the first setting suggestion effect can be executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 regardless of the variation pattern (variation time). , [BELL], [BELL], [BELL] combinations of mini-slot symbols can be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is super reach (120 seconds), the first setting suggestion performance and the expectation notice performance can be executed, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1 and 5C1 of the image display device 5 , 5R1, after the combination of mini-slot symbols [BELL], [BELL], [BELL] are stopped and displayed, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 are displayed with the same combination other than [BELL]. It is possible to stop display a combination of symbols (for example, [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon], or [7], [7], [7], etc.). According to such a configuration, in the mini slot 16TM030, it is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value, and it is also possible to execute the expectation preview effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the display result will be a "jackpot". Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (G), each time a first setting suggestion effect with a different execution rate depending on the setting value is executed, the player counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed. , the player himself calculates the execution rate of the first setting suggestion performance [execution rate of the first setting suggestion performance = (number of executions of the first setting suggestion performance/number of fluctuations) x 100], and the calculated first setting suggestion performance The player can estimate the setting value by determining which set value of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion performance for each well-known set value the execution ratio of the performance approximates.

For example, a configuration is adopted in which the decision as to whether or not to execute the expectation level preview performance is made before the decision as to whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion performance, and the expectation level preview performance is executed with priority over the first setting suggestion performance. In this case, due to the fact that the anticipation notice performance has been decided to be performed and the variable time, the lottery itself for executing the first setting suggestion performance may not be held, or the lottery for executing the first setting suggestion performance may be won. However, a case may occur in which the first setting suggestion effect is not executed because the expectation preview effect takes priority. As a result, the degree of deviation between the execution rate of the first setting suggestion performance calculated by the player and the execution rate of the first setting suggestion performance based on the actual setting value becomes large. Then, the importance of the first setting suggestion effect as an element for estimating the setting value decreases, and there is a possibility that the player will not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, as shown in steps S16TM2000 and S16TM2020 in FIG. A configuration is adopted in which the first setting suggestion performance is performed with priority over the expectation level preview performance.

(Specific example of executing change production and setting suggestion production)
Next, regarding specific examples when it is decided to execute the first change performance, the second change performance, the first setting suggestion performance, the second setting suggestion performance, and the expectation level preview performance, FIGS. 10-5 to 10 This will be explained using -7. FIG. 10-5 is a time chart when the first change performance, second change performance, first setting suggestion performance, second setting suggestion performance, and expectation level preview performance are executed, and FIGS. 10-6 and 10 -7 shows an example of a performance image displayed on the image display device 5 when performing the first change performance, the second change performance, the first setting suggestion performance, the second setting suggestion performance, and the expectation level preview performance. It is an explanatory diagram.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 10-5 to 10-7, when the CPU 103 receives a starting prize, in the first starting winning determination process (S101A), the display result of the variable display corresponding to the starting winning becomes "Jackpot". This is an example of a case where it is determined that this is the case (specified by a symbol designation command). Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display color) of the active display to be a red mode in the starting winning time change production determination process (not shown), and changes the active display change pattern. It is decided to use change pattern 022 (a pattern in which the number of executions of the first change performance is one and the first change performance of the success mode is executed), and it is decided to execute the first change performance of the success mode. This is an example of the case where

In addition, at the start of the fluctuation, the CPU 103 determines that the display result of the fluctuation display is a "jackpot" (specified by the display result specification command), and changes the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display to a "super reach jackpot". (120 seconds)" (specified by a variation pattern command) is an example. Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion performance at step S16TM2000 in the variation start performance determination process at the start of the variation, and executes the expectation preview performance at step S16TM2020. In step S16TM2040, it is decided to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to "extremely hot", and at the same time it is decided to execute the second change effect, and in step S16TM2050, the expectation level preview effect is set. This is an example where it is decided that the winning combination is "Cherry (Freeze)" and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability low base state, a display of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) is displayed. Based on the fact that the result was "miss", the performance control CPU 120 determines when the fluctuating display is fixed and stopped in the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. A combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "247") is continuously displayed. Also, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "miss", the small symbol display area 5l of the image display device 5, the small symbol display area 5c and the small symbol display area 5r, the combination of small symbols ("247" in this example) when the variable display is fixed and stopped is continuously displayed. The performance control CPU 120 displays four first pending displays 16TM001 in the first pending display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 in response to the fact that the first pending storage number is four.

When it is in the low-accuracy low-base state, as shown in FIG. A variation number display 16TM040 is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 124 times up to this point after transitioning to the low-accuracy low base state, and as shown in Figure 10-6 (1), "124" etc. is displayed as the fluctuation number display 16TM040. The screen is shown when the characters are displayed in the normal mode (white mode).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5's mini-slot symbol based on the fact that the winning combination (display result) of the variable display of the mini-slot symbols executed last time (most recently executed) was "lost". In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Replay], [Replay], and [Bell]) when the variable display is fixed and stopped is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (2), when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 10-5), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, variable display of decorative symbols is started, and in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, variable display of small symbols is started. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays an active display 16TM003 corresponding to the currently executed variable display in the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5, and corresponds to the fact that the first pending memory number is 3. Thus, three first pending displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first pending display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (2), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and in the step Based on the fact that it is determined in S16TM2070 to execute the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 125 times up to this point after transitioning to the low-accuracy low base state, and as shown in Figure 10-6 (2), "125" etc. is displayed as the fluctuation number display 16TM040. The case where the characters are displayed in purple is shown. The player understands that the setting suggestion has been made because the display mode of the change count display 16TM040 changes from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. At this time, the variable display of small symbols continues in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (3), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the decorative symbols in a fluctuating manner in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-6(3)). -5 timing of T2), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, Start variable display of symbols (first variable display of mini-slots). At this time, the variable display of small symbols continues in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (4), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-6(4)). -5 timing of T3), the second setting suggestion effect is ended, and the variation number display 16TM040 (characters such as "125") that was displayed in purple mode is returned to the normal mode (white mode). At this time, the variable display of small symbols continues in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and the variable display of mini-slot symbols continues in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. The display continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (5), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the decorative symbols in a fluctuating manner in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-6(5)). -5 timing of T4), it is decided that the change pattern of the active display will be change pattern 022 (the pattern in which the number of executions of the first change effect is 1 and the first change effect of the success mode is executed). Then, based on the fact that it has been decided to execute the first change effect of the success mode, the first change effect of the success mode is executed. In this example, a performance is performed in which a character 16TM050 appears and throws a ball toward the active display 16TM003. By displaying an image of the ball thrown by the character 16TM050 hitting the active display 16TM003, the player can expect that the aspect of the active display 16TM003 will change.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. , continues to display variable mini-slot symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (6), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the decorative symbols in a fluctuating manner in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. -5 timing of T5), the display mode of the active display 16TM003 changes from the normal mode to the red mode (in this example, from the white round display to the red round display) in response to the execution of the first change effect of the success mode. display). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [bell] [ [Bell] [Bell]) is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (7), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-6(7)). -5 timing of T6), based on the fact that it is determined in step S16TM2050 that the role for establishing the expectation level preview performance is "Cherry (Freeze)", the expectation level preview performance is executed, and the image display device In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of No. 5, variable display of mini-slot symbols in a freeze mode is started. In this example, when the variable display of the freeze mode is executed, the darkening image 16TM100 is displayed as a covering image covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, thereby reducing the visibility of the mini-slot symbols and making them visible. In the difficult state, variable display (scroll display or update display) of mini-slot symbols from the bottom to the top is executed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, in order to reduce the visibility of the mini-slot symbols, by displaying the darkened image 16TM100 that covers the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, mini-slot symbols with a lower display priority than the darkened image 16TM100 are displayed. Although the slot symbols are difficult to see, they are slightly visible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 is not 0%). A mini-slot symbol with a low display priority (an image whose display layer is lower and which appears deeper than the darkened image 16TM100 from the player's perspective) becomes completely invisible (that is, the layer transmittance of the darkened image 16TM100 is 0). %).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (8), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-6(8)). -5 timing of T7), the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5 is determined based on the fact that it is determined in step S16TM2050 that the winning role for the expectation level preview performance is "Cherry (Freeze)". , 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]) when the winning combination becomes "Cherry" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (9), the production control CPU 120 displays "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the ready-to-reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. A ready-to-reach state is established by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern, and the words "Reach!!" are displayed at the top of the image display device 5 (timing T8 in FIG. 10-5). At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display small symbols in a variable manner. That is, the small symbols are also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the ornamental symbols are stopped and displayed. The variable display continues without being displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the mini-slot 16TM030 from a mode corresponding to the first mini-slot variable display to a mode corresponding to the second mini-slot variable display, using the establishment of the ready-to-win state as a trigger. . That is, the area where the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed is changed from the three-reel mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 to the one-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. The 1-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 can display any of multiple types of mini-slot symbols ("no display", "CHANCE", "fiery heat", "FEVER") as a display result. If the result is a pattern that includes a preview character ("CHANCE", "Fever", "FEVER"), the icon of the preview character that is the display result is added to the active display based on the display result. A second change effect is executed. Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of mini-slot symbols in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (10), the production control CPU 120 determines in step S16TM2040 that the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is to be "extremely hot"; Based on the fact that it has been decided that the preview text for the anticipation level preview performance is "Very Hot", symbols including the "Very Hot" symbol are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 of the image display device 5. (timing of T9 in Figure 10-5). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (11), the performance control CPU 120 determines in step S16TM2040 to execute the second change performance (stop display of the symbol including the notice character). Based on this, the second change effect is executed (timing T10 in FIG. 10-5). In this example, when changing the display mode of the active display 16TM003, the mini-slot symbol stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in this example, the "hot" symbol) is moved from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. The display moves to the active display area 16TM013, and an effect that affects the active display 16TM003 is executed. More specifically, by displaying an effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the "Very Hot" symbol) that jumped out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 has hit the active display 16TM003, This suggests to the player that the aspect of the active display 16TM003 will change. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display small symbols in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (12), a battle effect is executed depending on the variation pattern of the super reach. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the friendly character 16TM060 and the enemy character 16TM070 (timing T11 shown in FIG. 10-5). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the small symbols in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 superimposes and displays a character icon based on the minislot symbol stopped and displayed in the minislot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in this example, a character icon of "Very Hot") on the active display 16TM003. The display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed. That is, a character icon indicating the same character as the displayed preview character (in this example, "extreme heat") is added to the active display 16TM003.

As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, when the active display area 16TM013 is displaying the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 , the mini-slot symbol combination (in this example, [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]) whose winning combination is "Cherry" is stopped and displayed (Figure 10-6 (8)), and then the mini-slot symbol combination is displayed. In area 5LCR1, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, "fierce heat") is stopped and displayed as a notice character for the anticipation level notice performance (Figure 10-7 (10)), and then it stops in mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. A second change effect is being executed in which a character icon indicating the same character as the displayed mini-slot symbol (in this example, "fierce heat") is added to the active display 16TM003 (Figures 10-7 (11) and (12) )).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed according to the combination of mini-slot symbols stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 where the first setting suggestion performance is executed. Since it becomes possible to perform a two-change performance, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

Additionally, as shown in Figures 10-5 to 10-7, the first setting suggestion performance is ended before the battle performance that is executed in accordance with the variation pattern of super reach is started. That's what I do. That is, before the battle performance is executed, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5, the combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion performance (in this example, [bell] [ Bell] [Bell]) will be hidden. In this way, by executing the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value in the first half of the variable display (before the reach state is established), that is, before the display result of the variable display is suggested, the first setting It is possible to increase interest in the suggestive performance. Also, the second half of the variable display (after the reach state is established), that is, the stage after the display result of the variable display has been suggested (after the battle performance that informs whether the display result will be a "jackpot" has started) In this case, since the first setting suggestion effect has already ended, attention can be drawn to the display result of the variable display (result of the battle effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (1), based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and not to execute the expectation level preview effect, the mini-slot symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. Combinations of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Replay], [Replay], and [Bell]) that result in a "lost" winning combination are stopped in areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (6), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 are The combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "Bell" (in this example, [Bell], [Bell], [Bell]) is stopped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (8), based on the fact that it has been decided to execute the expectation level preview performance and that the winning combination has been determined to be "cherry", the mini-slot symbol display on the image display device 5 is performed. A combination of mini-slot symbols (in this example, [Cherry], [Cherry], and [Cherry]) whose winning combination is "Cherry" is stopped in areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. In this way, the mini-slot 16TM030 is capable of displaying any one of the plurality of types of established combinations, so the variable display of the mini-slot symbols is executed in the mini-slot 16TM030, thereby improving the game performance. It can improve your interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-6 (2) and (3), the number of fluctuations is displayed in the lower left area of the screen of the image display device 5, which is different from the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5). A second setting suggestion effect is executed to change 16TM040 from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. Here, as shown in Figure 10-3 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect ranges from 3% (setting value 1) to 8% (setting value 6), whereas in Fig. As shown in 10-4 (M), the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect ranges from 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), so both effects are executed the same number of times. If it is assumed that the second setting suggestion effect is used, it will be easier to guess the setting value than the first setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the execution rate calculated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution rate (3% to 8%) corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6). Then, the setting value corresponding to the performance execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the setting value of the gaming machine. In addition, the execution rate calculated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution rate (10% to 20%) corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6), and the former The setting value corresponding to the closest performance execution rate is estimated as the setting value of the gaming machine. When such a guess is made, the setting value estimated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is better than the setting value estimated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect. There is a high possibility that it is the setting value of the machine (the reliability of the setting suggestion is high, or the accuracy of the setting suggestion is high.The reliability of the setting suggestion and the accuracy of the setting suggestion depend on the set value. This is a concept that changes due to marked differences in the execution rate of performances and differences in the ease with which a player can guess that a specific setting value (for example, setting value 6) is set. However, in this embodiment, for the first setting suggestion performance, an execution lottery is held every fluctuating display, and for the second setting suggestion performance, an execution lottery is held every 25 fluctuating displays. The execution frequency of the setting suggestion performance is higher than the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion performance. Therefore, the first setting suggestion effect is executed more times within the same number of fluctuation displays (within the same time) than the second setting suggestion effect, so it is useful for estimating the setting value. . In this way, by providing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects in which the ratio of the setting value suggested by the effect to the setting value of the gaming machine is different, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, small symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r provided at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. ing. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the special effect area 16TM035 (bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5), and the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5. 2 setting suggestion effect is being executed. In this way, at the top of the screen, a fluctuating display of small symbols is performed as a performance corresponding to the fluctuating display of special symbols, while at the bottom of the screen, setting suggestion performances (first setting suggestion performance, second setting suggestion performance, By executing the settings suggestion effect), it is possible to prevent one effect from reducing the visibility of the other effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the display mode of the active display based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, there are multiple types of display modes (display colors): a normal mode, a blue mode, and a red mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (5), as the character 16TM050 appears and the effect of throwing a ball toward the active display 16TM003 is executed, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 (display A first change effect is executed to change the color) from the normal mode (white round display) to the red mode (red circle display). In addition, a second mini-slot variable display is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 based on the determination result at the start of variation, and based on the character symbol that is the display result, the icon of the character indicated by the character symbol is displayed. A second change effect added to the active display 16TM003 is executed. In this way, the first change effect changes the display color of the active display according to the action effect executed in an area different from the area where the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the area where the first setting suggestion effect is executed ( By providing a plurality of systems of change effects, ie, a second change effect that changes the display shape of the active display in accordance with the action effect based on the preview characters displayed in the special effect area 16TM035), it is possible to increase the interest when changing the active display. can be further improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (11) and (12), when the second change effect is executed, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, "fierce heat") stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. jumps out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1, and an effect corresponding to the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 is executed. Specifically, after an effect image is displayed indicating that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, "Very Hot") that jumped out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 has hit the active display 16TM003, the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is displayed. A character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot symbol stopped at 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003. According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a relationship between the performance performed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-4 (K) and (L), the winning roles for the anticipation level preview performance (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) in mini-slot 16TM030 are "miss" and "watermelon". ”, “cherry”, and “set of 7”. Then, depending on the determined winning combination, the selection ratio of whether the display result of the second mini-slot variable display will be "No display", "CHANCE", "Very hot", or "FEVER" is determined. It's different. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display becomes any one of the character symbols "CHANCE", "Gekonetsu", and "FEVER", the mode of the character symbol, This matches the format of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003. That is, the form of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003 is determined depending on the winning combination of the expectation preview performance (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) executed in the mini-slot 16TM030. The proportions are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a relationship between the performance performed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 096IW, characteristic part 207SG and characteristic part 16TM)
A gaming machine may be a combination of any of the configurations described in the feature section 096IW, feature section 207SG, and feature section 16TM described above.

For example, when the configuration described in characteristic section 096IW and the configuration described in characteristic section 16TM are combined, the specific effect described in characteristic section 096IW (hereinafter referred to as the first effect) and the setting suggestion described in characteristic section 16TM are combined. The effects (hereinafter referred to as second effects) are effects that suggest the set value, so they may be the same effect or may be different effects. If the configuration described in characteristic section 096IW and the configuration described in characteristic section 16TM are combined to create a configuration in which the first performance and the second performance can be executed as different performances, the first performance and the second performance The reliability of the setting suggestion or the accuracy of the setting suggestion may be different from the production. In addition, when executing the first effect and the second effect during one change in the special symbol, by configuring the execution timing of each effect not to overlap, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming complicated. Preferably, it prevents

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described later may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and that has a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, The setting means that can be set to any one of the setting values (setting values "1" to "6") (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100, when the power is turned on, a setting confirmation process or a setting change process is executed, and the current a part for checking set values and changing set values), and a specific effect execution means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute specific effects (for example, specific effects in the first to seventh aspects). Steps 102IWS503, S506, S509, S512, S515, S518, S521, S907) and a variable display execution means capable of executing variable display (for example, a part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) ), and a ready-to-reach effect execution means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the fluctuation pattern is one of Pt13, Pt15, Pt21, and Pt22, step 102IWS805 is executed The specific performance execution means includes a plurality of performance modes including a specific mode (for example, the third mode, the fourth mode) and a special mode different from the specific mode (for example, the first mode). A second setting that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting value (e.g., setting value "1") in which the specific performance can be executed and the first setting value (for example, setting value "1") is set and controlled to be in an advantageous state. When a value (for example, set value "6") is set and the control is performed in an advantageous state, the specific performance of the special mode is executed at a higher rate (for example, the performance control CPU 120 ) By determining whether or not to execute the first specific effect using the first specific effect execution lottery table shown in ), the set value "6" is higher than the case where the jackpot is achieved with the set value "1" set. ” is set, the first specific effect is executed at a higher rate when a jackpot is achieved), and the specific effect can be executed while the reach effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 It is possible to execute specific effects (see Figures 8-9) during the process (see Figures 8-9), as well as suggest effects that suggest that the system will be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a hold display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.). An executable suggestive performance execution means, and a preparatory performance that can execute a preparatory performance that foretells that the suggestive performance will be executed before the suggestive performance is executed (for example, a pending display notice preparatory performance, a timer preparatory performance, etc.) The suggestion performance includes a first suggestion performance (for example, a pending display notice performance), a second suggestion performance (for example, a timer performance) that is different from the first suggestion performance, and a first suggestion performance and the first suggestion performance. The preparation performance includes a third suggestion performance (for example, a chance announcement performance) that is different from the second suggestion performance, and the preparation performance includes a first preparation performance (for example, pending display announcement preparation) that foretells that the first suggestion performance will be executed. The third suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance are performed during the same period. (See Figures 12-11 (A1) and (A2)). An example is a gaming machine in which the third suggestion performance is more likely to be executed when neither of the second preparation performances is executed (for example, see FIG. 12-10).

According to such a configuration, the player's interest can be improved in that the player pays attention to whether or not the specific performance is executed in a special manner. Furthermore, it is possible to improve the interest of a specific performance. Moreover, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition to the type of specific performance to be executed, the setting value may be suggested based on the type of suggestion performance or preparation performance. For example, multiple types of first, second, and third suggestion performances and first and second preparatory performances are prepared, and the suggestion performance and preparation performance are changed at each timing when the suggestion performance and preparation performance can be executed. By selecting from among multiple types by lottery etc., and varying the selection ratio of each aspect of the first, second and third suggestion effects and first and second preparation effects depending on the set values, The more advantageous the set value is to the player, the more likely the first, second, and third suggestion performances and the first and second preparation performances are to be executed in a specific type of manner. If this is done, the types of modes of suggestion effects and preparation effects will be more abundant, and when a specific type of suggestion effect or preparation effect is executed, the set value will be advantageous to the player. Since the expectations for the game will increase, the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.
In addition, if the setting value is suggested based on multiple elements (for example, the type of specific performance and the type of suggestion performance or preparation performance), it is advantageous to the player based on multiple factors. If a setting value that is advantageous to the player is suggested, the player can be more confident that the setting value is advantageous to the player, and even if a setting value that is advantageous to the player is not suggested for a certain element. If advantageous setting values are suggested based on other factors, the player can maintain a sense of expectation that the setting values are advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can improve interest and suitably maintain interest, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player is given. A means for executing a suggestion effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests that the control will be controlled in an advantageous state; and a preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance or a timer preparation performance) that foretells that the suggestion performance will be executed, and the suggestion performance is a first suggestion performance (for example, a suspension A second suggestion presentation (for example, a timer presentation) that is different from the first suggestion presentation (display notice presentation), and a third suggestion presentation that is different from the first suggestion presentation and the second suggestion presentation (for example, a chance announcement) The preparation performance includes a first preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance) that foretells that the first suggestion performance will be executed, and a second production performance that foretells that the second suggestion performance will be executed. The third suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel in the same period (Figure 12-11 (A1), (see (A2)), the third preparation effect is better when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed. Examples include gaming machines in which suggestive effects are easily executed (for example, see FIG. 12-10). Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.
(Explanation regarding characteristic part 153SG)

Next, gaming machines in other embodiments of the characteristic section 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-31.

First, FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components. As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board (gauge) that constitutes the game board surface. It is composed of a gaming machine frame (underframe) 153SG003 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball firing device and hit into this game area. In addition, in the game machine frame 153SG003, a glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window is located between the door open position where the front side of the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and the door closed position where the front side is closed, centering on the left side. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 153SG003a, and when the glass door frame 153SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk at the gaming parlor into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly hit (hit to the left) by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 153SG002R is a game area where the game ball is launched by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area where a game ball that is hit more strongly (hit to the right) than a game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 153SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the general winning hole 10 is arranged in the left gaming area 153SG002L, and in the right gaming area 153SG002R, from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right gaming area 153SG002R, a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game balls flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can enter the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game balls flowing down the right gaming area 153SG002R can enter the first winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A. It is possible to win a prize in the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, and the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is also possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area 153SG002L cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting prize opening. It has become.

Furthermore, a first pending storage display area 153SG005D and a second pending storage display area 153SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U, a pending memory display is performed that specifiably displays the number of pending memories (special figure pending memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game.

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, the main board 11 in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment is housed in a board case 153SG201 that is configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 includes a lock switch 153SG051 for changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value changing state in which the setting value can be changed, and a lock switch 153SG051 for changing the setting value changing state, and the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate), etc., which will be described later, in the setting value changing state. A setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value, and an open sensor 153SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment is a state in which a clerk at the game parlor or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also.

The setting switching main body section provided with operation parts that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052, is housed in the board case 153SG201 together with the main board 11. is exposed on the back side through an opening formed on the back side of the board case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 153SG201.

Since the board case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate it when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is closed. The operation becomes possible by using the game machine frame 153SG003 to open it. In addition, the lock switch 153SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by an employee of the game parlor, and therefore can only be operated by an employee who possesses the setting key. The lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch that can be switched ON and OFF, which will be described later, using a setting key. Note that although the feature section 153SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, they may be used as one key.

Further, a display monitor 153SG029 that can display set values and a base value to be described later is arranged in the board case 153SG201. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged at the top of the board case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 153SG201 when viewed visually. The main board 11 cannot be seen when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is not open, so the front side when viewing the main board 11 means the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is open. This is the front when viewed visually, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. However, the front side from which the main board 11 is viewed may be the same as the front side of the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area) is A first special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of variable display of one special symbol, a second special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of variable display of a second special symbol, and a first reservation display capable of displaying the number of first reservation memories. 153SG025A, a second reservation display 153SG025B that can display the second reservation memory number, a normal symbol display 153SG020 that can perform variable display of ordinary symbols, a regular symbol reservation display 153SG025C that can display the number of ordinary symbols reservations, A round display 153SG131 that can display the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during a jackpot game, in a game state where the game ball is launched towards the right game area 153SG002R, such as a high base state (time saving state) or a jackpot game state. A game information display section 153SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 153SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 153SG133 that lights up when in a variable probability state, and a time saving lamp 153SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are all arranged.

The first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B each include an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a miss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed using a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A displays the variable display result with two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Derivation and display are possible. In addition, in the case where the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B variably displays two types of jackpot symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 153SG004A The jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 153SG004B may overlap at least in part.

The first hold indicator 153SG025A and the second hold indicator 153SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 153SG025A and second hold display 153SG025B, if the number of hold memories is one, only the leftmost LED lights up, and as the number of hold memories increases, the LED on the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up sequentially. Each time a variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of this embodiment In section 153SG, the lights go out toward the left.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding memory is executed with priority. It looks like this. For this reason, for example, if there is one first special figure holding memory and two second special figure holding memories (only the LED at the left end of the first holding display 153SG025A is lit, and the second holding memory When the left two LEDs of display 153SG25B are lit), after the second special figure reservation memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory, the first special figure reservation A variable display based on memory is performed.

Further, the round indicator 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment lights up among the segments forming the round display 153SG131 differs depending on the jackpot type.

Control signals transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 are relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a production control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamps 9. This includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

In addition, the production control board 12 in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 153SG321 and a second movable body 153SG322 that can operate between the respective origin positions and production positions during variable display etc. An origin detection sensor 153SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 153SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 153SG321, and a second movable body 153SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322. An origin detection sensor 153SG332 that can detect this is connected.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 153SG in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 153SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-4 (B), the result of determining whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result) ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a gaming state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. Command A1XXH is a big winning opening notification command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening which notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special symbol pending memory number in order to display the special symbol pending memory number in a specifiable manner on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, etc.) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category that indicates whether the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is a command.

Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for specifying a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120). Command E101H is a hot start notification command that notifies that pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started without clearing the contents of RAM 102 (recovery from power outage, also referred to as hot start). Command E102H is a cold start notification command that notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started up (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores programs and fixed data for game control, and a workpiece for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 performs a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102. A fluctuation data reading operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. Transmission operations such as outputting various signals are also performed.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of the random number MR3 for determination, the random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

In this embodiment, each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random numbers The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-6 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is performed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is performed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, etc. may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-6, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, the super reach variation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than. In addition, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in this embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed. In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

In addition, in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into different types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. Instead of first determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is used without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided to determine the type of variation. It is also possible to first determine the type of a variation pattern from a random number value for pattern type determination, and then determine the variation pattern to be executed from among the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the variation content (performance content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (performance content) may be different depending on the set value that has been set. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 in which the normal reach is off, if the set value is 1, it will be the variation pattern in which the normal reach is out, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect will be used. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern in which a non-reach result is performed twice and a non-reach result, a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous performance is performed three times and a super reach result is used, etc.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A fluctuation pattern table and the like storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored.

The determination tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 11-7(A), the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 11-7(B), and the table shown in FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, and the small hit It includes a fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal pattern display result determination table (not shown), a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value. In detail, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. . The setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball payout rate and decreasing values in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value is that the largest value, 6, is the most disadvantageous value for the gaming parlor side, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the value for the gaming parlor side. Become.

FIGS. 11-7(A) and 11-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. Although the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment uses separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure as display result determination tables, the present invention is not limited to this. , a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in Figure 11-7(A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range is 0 to 65535 if the gaming state is normal or time saving state. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), when the setting value is 2 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(B), when the setting value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit judgment values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(B), when the setting value is 3 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in Figure 11-7(B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is from 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit". The other numerical ranges are assigned to "hit" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, among the hit judgment values mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others numeric range is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic unit 153SG of this embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/300, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/280, when the setting value is 3, it is 1/260, When the value is 4, it is 1/240, when the set value is 5, it is 1/220, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/200). Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/200, when the setting value is 2, it is 1/180, and when the setting value is 3, it is 1/200). 160, 1/140 if the setting value is 4, 1/120 if the setting value is 5, 1/100 if the setting value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of determining that the control is to be set to a jackpot gaming state is determined compared to when the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the value becomes high.

In addition, in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state is different depending on each setting value (for example, depending on the setting If the value is 1, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is multiplied by 1.5 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state is multiplied by the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. The magnification is approximately 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is 1.625 times compared to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). Good too.

In addition, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" and a small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the game state is controlled is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined by the first feature, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same value, different from those in the graphical display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" and a small hit is determined regardless of the gaming state or setting value. The probability of determining that the game state is controlled is set to 1/100.

Note that the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and controlling the small win game state is the same regardless of the setting value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state may be varied depending on the set value. Furthermore, the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small hit" and is controlled to a small win gaming state according to the variable special figure is different. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "small win" in each display result judgment table, we can see the display result for the first special figure when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33094. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the set value is 1, it can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33094. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal or time saving, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, in the second special pattern display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value is set in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the possible hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common jackpot judgment values Numerical values within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal state or time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is used to determine a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6, and 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment values that do not fall within the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot." Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In addition, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit determination values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, while the small The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6, with 32767 as the standard value for the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), and 32767 to 33421. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, the common numerical value range or the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range are determined based on the winning determination value of 1020, regardless of the gaming state and setting value. The judgment value included in the numerical range of consecutive 1 consisting of The variable display result is determined using the determination value included in the numerical value range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result judgment tables, if the variable special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the gaming state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure is different). The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, while the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is approximately 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each gaming state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot gaming state is determined is the highest. The judgment value is assigned such that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled (Jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>Setting value 4>Setting value 3>Setting value 2>Setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot). It is decided that A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol will be a small hit. In other words, the winning of the jackpot and small winning is determined with the probability according to the set value. Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 11-7 indicates the probability (proportion) of a big hit and the probability (proportion) of a small win. Also, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. It also means deciding whether to use the jackpot symbol or not. In addition, deciding whether to make a small hit means deciding whether to control to a small winning gaming state, but stopping at the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small winning symbol.

Note that although the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment provides a total of six setting values, 1 to 6, as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more.

FIGS. 11-8(A) and 11-8(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 11-8 (A), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 11-8(B), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is the table that is referenced to determine the

Here, the jackpot type in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 11-9. In the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the transition to a low-probability-high base state occurs; A jackpot B and a jackpot C (also referred to as probability-variable jackpots) are set in which the high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the game shifts to a high-accuracy/high base state.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state according to "B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds).

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" is performed by executing the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment), or by executing the special figure game for the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the figure game is executed.

On the other hand, the high accuracy control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot B and jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is jackpot B or jackpot C, the high accuracy control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is a so-called multi-family situation.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, a configuration in which three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. Less than or equal to four types, or four or more types may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-8 (A), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-8 (B), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. In other words, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning hole in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. , the jackpot type is determined based on a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Note that in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is It may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and selects a fluctuation pattern among the aforementioned multiple types according to the predetermined result. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination table includes a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot that is used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result a "big hit", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for making the variable display result a "small hit". A jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is prepared in advance, which is used when the variable display result is predetermined as a "loss", and a loss fluctuation pattern determination table is used when it is predetermined that the variable display result will be a "loss". ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10(A) and 11-10(B), the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (Jackpot A ) and the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C are prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (for jackpot A) and the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each of the variation patterns (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in Figure 11-10 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 400 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1 -1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). Assigned.

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), out of the range of MR3 judgment values from 1 to 997, 1 to 200 are normal reach jackpot fluctuations. 201 to 550 are assigned to the Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2). 3) is assigned.

In addition, in the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, for the fluctuation pattern of the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random number value out of the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is the determination value. is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 0 to 997 are small win variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small win in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two or more variation patterns of the small win. A variation pattern may be provided.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss includes a fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending memories is one or less in a low base gaming state where time saving control is not implemented, and a low base A variation pattern determination table B for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and a variation pattern for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, there are variation patterns for non-reach misses without shortening (PA1-1), variation patterns for normal reach misses (PA2-1), variation patterns for super reach α misses (PA2-2), and super reach α miss variation patterns (PA2-2). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value for the variation pattern (PA2-3) with the reach β out of range within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in Figure 11-11(A), in the variation pattern judgment table A for failure (for low base medium total pending memory number of 1 or less), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 450 out of the range of 1 to 997. 451 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) where the normal reach is off, and 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern where the super reach α is off (PA1-1). It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 2 to 4, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) where reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off (PA2-3). It is being

As shown in FIG. 11-11(B), in the variation pattern judgment table B for failure (for low base medium total pending storage number of 2 to 4), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 997 in the range of 1 to 997. 500 is assigned to the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α deviation. 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table C for failure, there is a shortened non-reach failure variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach failure variation pattern (PA2-1), a super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern judgment can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) where reach α is off and the variation pattern where super reach β is off (PA2-3). It is being

As shown in FIG. 11-11(C), in the variation pattern judgment table C for failure (for the total pending memory number of 5 or more during low base), the judgment value of MR3 is 1 to 550 out of the range of 1 to 997. 551 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α variation patterns. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off.

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, there is a shortened non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-4), a normal reach deviation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach α deviation pattern that corresponds to the time saving control. (PA2-2) and a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the super reach β is off, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in Figure 11-11(D), in the variation pattern judgment table D for miss (high base medium), out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 550 are non-reach variation. The range from 551 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-1) where normal reach is off, and the range from 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern where super reach α is off (PA2-2). , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the losing variation pattern determination tables A to D, the ratio of determining non-reach variation patterns and normal reach variation patterns is set higher than the ratio of determining super reach variation patterns. In addition, when using fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for failure, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values is a fluctuation pattern of failure of super reach α, and 901 to 997 is a fluctuation pattern of failure of super reach β. In other words, if the variable display result assigned to each variation pattern is a failure, the Super Reach variation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, so the variable display based on the Super Reach variation pattern is not executed. This can prevent the effectiveness from decreasing.

Note that in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern for losing super reach α and the determination ratio for the fluctuation pattern for losing super reach β are completely the same between each set value. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of super reach β are based on the difference between each setting value. may differ by a small difference (for example, about 1%).

Note that although the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a failure, the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is not the same, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, or the percentage of variation between non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination ratios may be the same.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and furthermore, the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. The fluctuation time of the outlier fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see Figure 11-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, by determining a non-reach variation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the retained memories are more easily digested, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By making a starting win when you are in a position, you will be less likely to receive a wasteful starting winning that is not stored in your memory, and if the number of held memories decreases, the fluctuation time will be long. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, thereby making it possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-11(A) to 11-11(C), fluctuation pattern determination tables for failure that differ depending on the total number of pending memories are used to Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for loss depending on the number of reserved memories of the special symbol, and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to perform a reach effect for each determined variation pattern and which reach effect to perform. , the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the reach performance based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, variable display results, etc., and which reach performance to execute. You may decide by drawing lots whether to do so or not.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-1 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display on the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display section 153SG029A, a second display section 153SG029B, a third display section 153SG029C, and a fourth display section 153SG029D. The first display section 153SG029A to the fifth display section 153SG29E are each composed of 7 segments formed by 7 segments that form a figure 8, and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 153SG029A to fifth display section 153SG29E are capable of lighting up or blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc., respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in extremely short cycles.

Note that the display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment is executed using the area outside the test target in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 when testing the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

The display monitor 153SG029 displays the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls out in all game states, as shown in Figures 11-12 (B) and 11-12 (C). Base L, which is the real-time value during measurement; Base 1, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls of the first out in all game states; Base 2 is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6,000 pitches out for the second time, and the normal state for every 6000 pitches for the third out (low probability low base state) in all game states. Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed as percentages on the display monitor 153SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 153SG029, in order to display the abbreviation "bL." for the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A, and "L." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B. " is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 153SG029C and the fourth display section 153SG029D. When displaying base 1 on display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B in order to display "b1." which is the abbreviation of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 153SG029C and the fourth display section 153SG029D. When displaying base 2 on display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B in order to display "b2.", which is the abbreviation of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 153SG029C and the fourth display section 153SG029D. When displaying base 3 on display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." of the base. is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display section 153SG029C and the fourth display section 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of this embodiment, control is executed to sequentially display these bases L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 under the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display on the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at 5 second intervals. The base values displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 are displayed in different colors depending on the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. If it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in blue, and if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". 5", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in red, and when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, a clerk at the gaming parlor can identify the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by simply checking the display color on the display monitor 153SG029, without having the CPU 103 execute the setting value changing process described later. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-2 has an area for storing various data used for controlling performance operations, such as the one shown in FIG. 11-13(A), for example. A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 11-13(A) includes a production control flag setting section 153SG191, a production control timer setting section 153SG192, a production control counter setting section 153SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 153SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 153SG191 has multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 153SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 153SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 153SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being displayed in a variable manner (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the fluctuation display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. At the same time, the stored contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the corresponding start condition is satisfied. It is cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A in the characteristic section 153SG of this embodiment, a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display in the prefetch notice setting process (FIG. 11-18), which will be described later. A storage area for a pending display flag to be set is secured for each storage area (entry).

In addition, in the case where execution of the pending display notice effect is not determined in the prefetch notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the pending memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U, and when it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect. "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star ( By setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display for special modes (for example, blue or red cameras), A pending memory display in a manner different from the display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U, and in the fluctuating display corresponding to the pending memory display, the possibility of a jackpot or super It is foretold that there is a high possibility that it will be a reach, and that there is a high possibility that a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 will be executed.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 153SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered in the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-13(B), when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is being displayed in a variable manner at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 11-14 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (153SGSa001). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (153SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004;Y) further determines whether the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6, that is, whether a normal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (153SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), the process advances to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; Y) is whether or not the setting value changing flag is set, which indicates that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power was cut off (the power cut occurred while the setting value changing process was being executed). (153SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clearing process described later has been executed. If set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and it is determined whether the clear switch is ON, that is, whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started while the clear switch was being operated. (153SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010); if the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa008; N), proceed to 153SGSa011 without executing 153SGSa010. move on.

At 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 153SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 153SG003 open (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (153SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), execute setting value change processing (153SGSa013b) to change the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, proceed to 153SGSa013d, and clear the RAM clear flag. If not set (153SGSa013a; N), a setting value confirmation process (153SGSa013c) for confirming the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed and the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d.

In the setting value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set setting value on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, each time the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, based on the lock switch 153SG051 being turned off, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the setting value that is newly stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. A command is output to the production control CPU 120.

Furthermore, in the setting value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set setting value on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, based on the fact that the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the display of the set value on the display monitor 153SG029 may be ended.

Note that in 153SGSa011, if the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

In 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether to clear the RAM 102 (or execute the RAM clear process (153SGSa009)) when starting up the pachinko gaming machine 1 this time. 153SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), proceed to 153SGSa014 after executing RAM clear processing (153SGSa013e), and if the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013d; N), RAM clear processing (153SGSa013e) Proceed to 153SGSa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear processing (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes processing to set "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the setting value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. This clears the contents of all addresses except for the dress in question.

At 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), proceed to 153SGSa022; if the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is checked when the power supply is stopped (power cutoff). Restoration processing is performed to return to the state (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen. Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko game machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power outage (booted with a hot start), transmits a command at the time of restoration including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028. (153SGSa016).

Further, in 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the clear switch being operated (153SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

If lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in RAM 102, RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, if the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to the official procedure by the operation of an employee of the game parlor, etc. (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened, the lock switch 153SG051 is turned on, and the clear switch is operated while the pachinko game is played) When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (153SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the processes 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 described above are executed.

Note that if the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), or if the open sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process advances to 153SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start, and transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the performance control board 12 (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying a cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (153SGSa023), and all segments forming the display monitor 153SG029 start blinking to start notification of a cold start. (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 increments the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (153SGSa025), and determines whether the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). If the cold start notification timer has not timed out (153SGSa026; N), the processes of 153SGSa025 and 153SGSa026 are repeatedly executed, and if the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 153SG029 are executed. stops blinking (153SGSa027) and proceeds to 153SGSa028.

Note that the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 blink for a period of a cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of a call and start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be made to blink. However, at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) to initialize the random number circuit 104, and sets the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (153SGSa029) and interrupts are enabled (153SGSa030). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 sends a message to the production control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormal error) or that the power has recovered from a power outage during a setting change, which will be described later. 153SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution wait timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 increments the value of the error notification execution wait timer by 1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether the error notification execution wait timer has timed out (153SGSa034). If the error notification execution wait timer has not timed out (153SGSa034; N), the processes of 153SGSa033 and 153SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution wait timer has timed out (153SGSa034; Y), a setting value abnormal error occurs. The first display section 153SG029A, the second display section 153SG029B, the third display section 153SG029C, and the fourth display section 153SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 153SG029, are used as a notification (error notification) that the power has recovered from a power outage during the occurrence of an error or a setting change. "E." is displayed in each of (153SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), and controls the game through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer at the venue, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes 153SGSa032 to 153SGSa037 until a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by an operation such as an operation by a clerk at the game parlor), thereby displaying the display monitor 153SG029. , the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B perform error occurrence notification.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that when an abnormal setting value is set or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage while changing the setting value, the display monitor 153SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the staff of the gaming hall can check the occurrence of an error and the settings from both the front and back sides of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the device has recovered from a power outage during a change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or recovery from a power outage while changing setting values can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the game control main processing of the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the RAM clearing process (153SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag, the present invention is not limited to this; is not after determining that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008;Y) or clearing the setting value changing flag in 153SGSa021, but when determining that the RAM clear flag is set in 153SGSa014 (153SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 11-15 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (153SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (153SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103 ).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (153SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 153SGS105 (153SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106 ).

After executing either of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the special figure pending storage number corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section (not shown). Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure holding storage section (not shown), while when the starting opening buffer value is "2" Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in a second special figure reservation storage section (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the fluctuating display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", as well as the fluctuating display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to determine the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 153SGS 109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 153SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (153SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the process of 153SGS111, a winning random value determination process is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (153SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (Y in 153SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (153SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 153SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in 153SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-16(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 153SGS 112 of FIG. 11-15 as the winning random value determination process. In the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5) is performed to change the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) to " Judgments are made as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state as a "big hit", and whether to control to the small win game state by treating the special figure display result as a "small win". In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of 153SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Accordingly, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a special pattern display result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a small winning symbol is derived and displayed as a special pattern display result, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. A determination is made as to whether or not the display mode is a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols starts based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, in other words, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to win the jackpot or small. Before starting the game, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a “big hit” or “small hit” and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result. Then, as will be described later, the performance control CPU 120 or the like starts to execute a hold display preview performance.

In the prize winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 11-16(A), the CPU 103 first determines whether the pachinko game is played by checking the status of the time saving flag or probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section (not shown), for example. The current gaming state in the gaming machine 1 is specified (153SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that the variable probability state is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the variable time state is present when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and determines that the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are both off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that the state is normal.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. What is necessary is to set the second special figure display result determination table shown in (B).

After that, referring to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot judgment range) according to the setting value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result judgment table, the special figure extracted at 153 SGS 109 in Figure 11-15 is It is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for display result determination is within the corresponding jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, the individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 calculates the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing a point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the fluctuating display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in 153SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be no jackpot during variable display (153SGS123;N), it is further set to Pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result determination table. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment extracted at 153SGS109 in Figure 11-15 with reference to the small hit numerical range (small hit judgment range) according to the setting value set. It is determined whether or not it is within the corresponding small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 calculates the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the small hit judgment range, the CPU 103 uses the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the small hit judgment range. It is sufficient if it can be determined whether the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range by comparing the above. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

If it is determined in 153SGS124 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will not be a small hit during variable display (153SGS124;N), in response to the variable display result being "miss". The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (153SGS125), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (153SGS126). If the time saving flag is not set (153SGS126; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for failure (153SGS127), and if the time saving flag is set (153SGS126; Y), select the fluctuation pattern for failure. Select and set judgment table D (153SGSS128).

Note that the failure variation pattern determination table A is a failure variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is one or less, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-11(D), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed. be.

Note that in the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, there is also a fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4. A fluctuation pattern determination table B for use and a fluctuation pattern determination table C for failure, which is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8, are prepared in advance, but as shown in Figure 11-11, these Among the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, values from 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. In the out-of-reach variation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the possible range of the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. On the other hand, in the losing variation pattern determination tables A to C, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern (variation category) using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in 153SGS132, which will be described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be possible even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since this is a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, the winning variation pattern determination table A is used to determine the winning start.

As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), when it is determined that the jackpot determination range is within the jackpot determination range at 153SGS123, that is, when it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (153SGS123; Y), the jackpot type determination The jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 (153SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in 153SG130 is executed (153SG131), and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern as one of a plurality of jackpot fluctuation patterns. Set (153SG132).

In addition, if 153SGS124 determines that it is within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit during variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command according to the small hit type is sent. Execute the settings (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, the fluctuation pattern determination table set in the process of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132 and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (153SGS133). In the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-16(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", "non-reach" is commonly displayed regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that has a variable display mode, a variable category that has a variable display mode of "Super Reach", and a variable category that has a variable display mode of "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) of "Other". It is only necessary to provide a variable category and determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 153SGS132 to the performance control board 12 (153SGS134), and then the winning random value determination process is ended.

FIG. 11-17 is a part of a flowchart of the production control process processing (S76) in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment. In the performance control process processing in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, after the prefetch notice setting process (S161) shown in FIG. After executing the pending display update process in which the display mode and number of displayed pending memory displays are updated according to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13(B), any one of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 is executed. It is designed to perform the following processing.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing the pre-read notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 11-17. In the prefetch notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (153SGS242). If there is no entry whose pending display flag is not set, the prefetch notice setting process ends, and if there is an entry whose pending display flag is not set, the value of the pending display flag is already set to one of 1 to 4. It is determined whether there is an entry that is set (153SGS243).

If there is an entry for which the value of the pending display flag has already been set to one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display preview effect has already been executed, the entry (the pending display flag is set in 153SGS242) Set "0" to the pending display flag of the entry for which the pending display notice effect is not executed (in other words, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry as "○"). The advance notice setting process ends (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry in which the value of the pending display flag is already set to one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display preview performance has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, if a pending display preview performance has already been executed, execution of a new pending display preview performance is restricted.

If there is no entry whose pending display flag is set to one of the values 1 to 4 in 153SGS243, the production control CPU 120 selects the entry (the entry for which the pending display flag was determined not to be set in 153SGS242). ) determines whether the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot (153SGS244). If the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and the jackpot type is extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting section 153SG193, etc. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice performance and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to the jackpot pending display notice performance determination table (not shown), it is possible to determine whether or not the pending display notice performance will be executed and whether or not the pending display is to be displayed. The display pattern for executing the preview performance is determined (153SGS246).

In the 153SG 246, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pending display preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-19(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-19(A), the presence or absence of a pending display preview performance and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of 153SGS245.

In the characteristic section 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (notice types) of the pending display notice effect are provided: display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in a white star shape (☆) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed with a blue camera in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U, and the pending display is When the display pattern of the preview performance is determined to be the display pattern δ, the pending memory display is displayed with a red camera in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. Further, when it is decided not to execute the pending display preview performance, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (◯) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in Figure 11-19 (A), if the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55%. At a rate of 20%, it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect in display pattern α, at a rate of 20% it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect in display pattern β, and at a rate of 10%, a pending display notice effect in display pattern γ is decided to be executed. is decided to be executed, and it is decided to execute the pending display preview performance in the display pattern δ at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probable variable jackpot), it is decided at a rate of 5% to not execute the pending display notice performance, and at a rate of 20%, it is decided to not execute the pending display notice performance in display pattern α. Execution is decided, and at a rate of 55% it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β, at a rate of 10% it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ, and at a rate of 10% It is decided to execute the pending display preview performance in the display pattern δ.

Returning to 153SGS244, if the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the production control CPU 120 specifies the variation category from the variation category specification command of the entry (153SGS248), and, for example, uses the random number circuit 124 or production control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice performance extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the jackpot type specified in the 153SGS249, refer to a small hit/miss pending display notice performance determination table (not shown). By doing so, whether or not to execute the pending display preview performance and the display pattern are determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B), if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is non-reach, it is determined at a rate of 95% that the pending display preview effect will not be executed; At a rate of 5%, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in display pattern α, at a rate of 0%, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in display pattern β, and at a rate of 0%, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in display pattern γ. It is decided to execute the hold display preview performance, and it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance in the display pattern δ at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a miss or a small hit and the variable category is other (if the normal reach is a miss or a small hit), it will be decided not to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 75%, and at a rate of 20%. At a rate of 5%, it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect in display pattern α, at a rate of 5% it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect in display pattern β, and at a rate of 0%, it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect in display pattern γ. It is decided to execute the performance, and it is decided to execute the suspended display preview performance in the display pattern δ at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is super reach, it is decided at a rate of 55% not to execute the pending display preview effect, and at a rate of 25%, it is decided to not execute the pending display preview effect in the display pattern α. Execution is decided, and at a rate of 10% it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in display pattern β, at a rate of 5% it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in display pattern γ, and at a rate of 5% It is decided to execute the pending display preview performance in the display pattern δ.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 11-19(A) and 11-19(B), in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, when the hold display preview performance is executed, when the hold display preview performance is not executed, In addition, when the pending display notice effect is executed in display pattern β, it is controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when the pending display notice effect is executed in display pattern α. The jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The probability of a probability-variable jackpot becomes higher, and the player's expectation level for a probability-variable jackpot can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion performance described later, the degree of expectation for the control to be in a jackpot gaming state is higher than that of the display pattern α and the display pattern β (jackpot expectation level). is not set to be high, and the expectation level for the jackpot type to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot expectation level) is the same.

In the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result becomes a jackpot are the normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, and as shown in FIG. 11-19, the display patterns γ and The display pattern δ is determined when the variable display result is a jackpot or the variable display result is a loss and the variable category is super reach. In other words, it is also suggested that the reserved memory display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (aspects of blue and red cameras) is a super reach variable display that can execute the setting suggestion performance described later. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-19 (B), when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when the special symbol fluctuation time is determined to be shorter than super reach, In this case, the pending memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 11-18, after executing the process of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the pending display preview performance (153SGS250). If it is decided to execute a pending display preview effect, set the pending display flag of the entry to a value (one of 1 to 4) that corresponds to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 and perform pre-reading. The notice setting process ends (153SGS247). Furthermore, if it has been decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0", which corresponds to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-read notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer (not shown) are set. Various command data and various flags that are stored in correspondence (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol that is being variably displayed, and the first to fourth special symbols in the first special symbol pending memory) The corresponding various command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271;N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the Various command data and various flags (i.e., when variable display is in progress Shift various command data and various flags corresponding to the 2nd special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the 1st to 4th 2nd special symbol pending memory) to the upper level by one buffer number. (153SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the variable pattern designation command from the variable pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (153SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, determines that 3 symbols are even symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot B, the stop symbols may include multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333'', ``555'', ``999'', etc.). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols in which 3 symbols are aligned in "7" (jackpot symbol) is determined as the stop symbol. do. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 5th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbol will be a chance symbol indicating a small hit (the 3rd symbol is based on a specific rule). ``334'', ``556'', ``778'', etc.) which are irregular. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not a Super Reach variation pattern, proceed to 153SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach variation pattern, a rear variable display hint effect is performed during the reach effect of the variable display. A rear variable display suggestive effect determination process is executed to determine whether to execute the rear variable display suggestive effect and which effect is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect (153SGS278). In other words, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the rear variable display suggestion performance (jackpot suggestion performance and setting suggestion performance) is a variation of the variation pattern of the super reach with a long special symbol variation time. It can only be executed on the display, and it will not be executed on the variable display of normal reach or non-reach variation patterns where the special symbol variation time is short.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the variable display result becomes a jackpot as a suggestion effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. In addition, it is possible to perform a character performance suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or a timer performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot and also suggests a period until the start of execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display. , During the reach performance which is the second half of the variable display, a jackpot suggestion production that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a suggestion production during the rear variable display, or a setting that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Suggestive effects can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is a process for determining whether to execute the suggestion performance during the rear variable display and whether to execute the jackpot suggestion performance or the setting suggestion performance during the reach performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display. .

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the suggestion performance (either the jackpot suggestion performance or the setting suggestion performance) during the rear variable display in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is decided in the process of 153SGS278 not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the process advances to 153SGS285, and if it is decided in the process of 153SGS278 to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the front part is further changed from the start of the variable display. Front variable display suggestive performance determining processing is executed to determine which of the character performance and timer performance is to be executed as the variable display suggestive performance (153SGS280). In other words, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, unless execution of the rear variable display effect is determined, execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is not determined. In the variable reach and normal reach displays, timer effects and character effects are not performed as suggested effects during the front variable display.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute a character performance as a suggested performance during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute a character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, the wait timer for starting the suggestion effect during the rear variable display indicates the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (as shown in Figure 11-28 (A)). 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect), proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if it is decided to execute the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, wait for the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the hint effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in Figure 11-28 (B), the value according to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is a 25-second effect) 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect if the timer effect is pattern TS-1, and 10 seconds after the start of the reach effect if the timer effect is pattern TS-2, which has a 30 second effect) ) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control is executed for the device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 153SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are variably displayed according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is ended (153SGS290).

FIG. 11-21 is a flowchart showing the rear variable display suggestive effect determination process (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-20. In the rear variable display suggestive effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the starting winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13(B) to flag the pending display flag corresponding to the variable display. (153SGS301). In addition, in this process, if the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is specified. If the display start command reception flag is set, it is sufficient to specify the entry "2-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestion performance during rear variable display and the performance to be executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display based on the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (A), if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, if the pending display preview effect is being executed for the variable display in question. If not, at a rate of 90% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, at a rate of 10% it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the variable rear display, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. It is decided to execute a set suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during variable display. In addition, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If so, at a rate of 50% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, at a rate of 50% it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3", that is, if the pending memory display is displayed with a blue camera as a pending display notice effect targeting the variable display, 30 At a rate of 35%, it is decided to not execute the suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 35%, it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 35%, it is decided to perform the suggestion performance during the rear variable display. Decide whether to perform the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, if the pending memory display is displayed with a red camera as a pending display notice effect targeting the variable display, the value is 0. At a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, and at a rate of 70%, it is decided to perform a suggestion performance during the rear variable display. Decide whether to perform the setting suggestion effect.

In other words, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display preview performance is executed for the variable display, the performance is higher than when the hold display preview performance is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the suggestion effect during rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display preview effect for the variable display (if the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed as a white rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined based on the ratio, and the pending memory display was displayed as a white rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the set suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case of the rear variable display.

In addition, we focused on cases where the pending memory display was displayed with a blue or red camera (when the value of the pending display flag was "3" or "4") as a pending display preview effect for the variable display. Then, if the pending memory display was displayed on a red camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display, the pending memory display will be displayed on a blue camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is decided at a higher rate than when the rear variable display is displayed. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as a suggestion effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the rear variable display.

From the above, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, if the pending memory display is displayed in a rectangle or star shape as a pending display notice performance for the variable display, the rear variable display suggestion performance is While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion performance will be executed, the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display preview performance targeting the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on a red camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display, the pending memory display will be displayed on a blue camera as a pending display notice performance targeting the variable display. Since the proportion of setting suggestion presentations being executed as suggestion presentations during the rear variable display is higher than when the rear variable display is displayed, there is a higher probability that the setting suggestion presentation will be executed as a suggestion presentation during the rear variable display. It is now possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 11-21, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the suggestion performance during rear variable display in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). If it is decided in the processing of 153SGS302 not to execute the suggestion effect during rear variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during rear variable display in the process of 153SGS302, further In the process of , 153SGS302, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display (153SGS304).

When it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the process of 153SGS302, a performance pattern for the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the process for determining the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is executed. End (153SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 11-22(B), a total of three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305. Among these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (jackpot expectation: low) that suggests that the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is Pattern AS-3 is a production pattern that suggests that the percentage of the variable display result becoming a jackpot is higher than that of pattern AS-1 (jackpot expectation level: medium), and pattern AS-3 has the highest percentage of the variable display result becoming a jackpot. This is a performance pattern that suggests a high jackpot (expectation level of jackpot: high).

In the process of the 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 11-23, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern of the jackpot suggestion performance to pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when it is decided in the process of 153SGS302 to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and selects the setting value (pachinko gaming machine 1 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified setting value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS307).

As shown in FIG. 11-22(B), a total of five patterns, pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the 153SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an even number (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), and pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (for example, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the setting value is one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that it is determined whether the setting value is 5 or 6 (high setting). For patterns SS-3 and SS-4, when the setting value is either 5 or 6, the expectation level for the setting value to be 5 or 6 is considered to be low. 6 is said to have high expectations.

Note that in this feature section 153SG, setting values 1 to 4 will be explained as low settings and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings, but setting values 1 to 3 may be low settings and setting values 4 to 6 may be high settings. However, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 as low settings, setting values 3 and 4 as intermediate settings, and setting values 5 and 6 as high settings.

In the processing of the 153SGS 307 described above, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60% when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, as shown in FIG. 11-24. 1, pattern SS-2 is selected at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 6%, and pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Decided on SS-5. In addition, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Furthermore, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of %, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the performance pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15%. Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In this way, in this feature section 153SG, when the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, it is suggested that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the setting value suggestion is executed. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by performing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-5, it is determined that the setting value is 6.

FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing the front variable display suggestive effect determination process (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-20. In the front variable display suggestive effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). Further, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

If it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion performance as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display, based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the variable display result, whether or not to execute the suggestion performance during the front variable display and the suggestion during the front variable display. The performance to be executed is determined from the character performance and the timer performance (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-26 (A), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided to not execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. At 30%, it is decided to execute a character presentation as a suggestion presentation during the front variable display, and at a rate of 30%, it is decided to execute a timer presentation as a suggestion presentation during the front variable display. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect, 70% of the time it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display. Then, at a rate of 5%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a higher rate during the front variable display than when the variable display result is a loss. It is decided to execute the suggestion effect, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution of the character effect and the timer effect are determined at the same rate as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result If it is a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestion performance during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation level of the timer performance is higher than the jackpot expectation level of the character performance. It is set.

In addition, when execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 executes the suggestion effect during the front variable display based on the execution of the setting suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and the suggestion effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-26 (B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided not to perform the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. At 70%, it is decided to execute a character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display, and at a rate of 70%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect, at a rate of 80% it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Then, at a rate of 20%, it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the ratio of the variable display result to the front variable display is higher than when the variable display result is a loss. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the setting is such that, regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, the execution of the character effect will not be determined as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. That is, the jackpot expectation level of the timer performance is set higher than the jackpot expectation level of the character performance.

For this reason, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution of the timer effect is decided at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so the front variable display is indicated. When a timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the suggestion effect during front variable display (153SGS315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the process for determining the suggestion effect during the front variable display ends, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further It is determined whether or not it has been decided to execute a character presentation as a suggested presentation during variable display (153SGS316).

If it has been decided to execute a character performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display, a performance pattern for the character performance is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the process for determining the suggestive performance during the front variable display is ended. (153SGS317).

Furthermore, as the effect patterns for character effects that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS317, there are a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, as shown in FIG. 11-26(C). . Among these production patterns, pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (jackpot expectation level: low) that suggests that by displaying character A (not shown) on the image display device 5, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot is the lowest. Yes, pattern CS-2 is a production pattern (Jackpot expectation: medium) that suggests that the proportion of variable display results that become jackpots by displaying character B (not shown) on image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 11-27(A), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 changes the performance pattern of the character performance to pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. , and pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the performance pattern of the character performance is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the above-mentioned part variable display suggestive effect determination process is ended (153SGS318).

As the performance patterns of the timer performance that can be determined in the processing of the 153SGS 318, a total of two performance patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided as shown in FIG. 11-26(C). Among these performance patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the proportion of variable display results that become jackpots on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 for character performances (Jackpot expectation: high ), this is a performance that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display together with the image of character It suggests that this is higher than the character performance pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (jackpot expectation level: high), and the period until the start of execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is shown for 25 seconds with the image of character Y. (See Figures 11-27(C), 11-29(D), and 11-29(E)).

Therefore, in the processing of 153SGS318, the performance control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Pattern TS-1 is determined at a rate of 80%, and pattern TS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, if the rear variable display suggestion performance that has been decided to be executed is a setting suggestion performance, the performance control CPU 120 determines pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decided on 2.

In other words, when a timer effect is executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2 (in other words, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2) (in other words, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1), When the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the rate at which the setting suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance during rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance period of the timer performance and the characters displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2, it is possible to make the player expect the setting suggestion effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

As described above, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-26(D), when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during front variable display, the suggestion effect during front variable display is The expectation level of the jackpot is set higher than when the character performance is executed as a character performance, and the probability of a jackpot is set as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character performance is performed as a suggestion performance during the front variable display. The performance is now executed.

As shown in FIGS. 11-20 to 11-28, when it is decided to execute the front variable display suggestive effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display suggestive effect during the variable display process (S172). Process data corresponding to the production pattern of the front variable display suggestion production may be set, and the production device may be controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display production processing (S172). In addition, when it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 reduces the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display effect processing is executed. Then, based on the fact that the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display becomes 0, process data corresponding to the determined performance pattern of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display performance process (S172), the performance device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-28(A) and 11-28(B), the jackpot suggestion performance and setting suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display in this feature section 153SG are performed during the execution period of the reach performance. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a longer period than the special symbol variation time of the non-reach variation pattern (see FIG. 11-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the jackpot suggestion performance or the setting suggestion performance.

Next, the performance mode during variable display in the main feature section 153SG will be explained based on FIGS. 11-29 to 11-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 11-29(A) and 11-29(B), a new starting winning occurs during the variable display, and based on the starting winning, a pending memory display is displayed as a pre-read preview effect. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. .

As shown in FIGS. 11-29(C) to 11-29(E), when a new variable display corresponding to the hold memory display mode of the camera is started, the front A timer effect as a suggestive effect during variable display is started. At this time, if the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. 11-29(D), the image 153SG005X of the character A timer update display is started for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestive performance during variable display. In addition, when the performance pattern of the timer performance is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. The timer starts updating and displaying for 30 seconds, which is the period until the suggestive effect is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-30(F) to 11-30(H), when the variable display progresses with the timer update display up to the suggestive effect during rear variable display, the super reach effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds during execution of the super reach performance (the timer performance ends), a jackpot suggestion performance or a setting suggestion performance is started as a suggestion performance during rear variable display.

Specifically, when it is decided to execute a jackpot suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (I). , a message such as "Chance!" indicating that the expectation level of jackpot is low is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined production pattern is pattern AS-2, the pattern shown in FIG. 11-30 (J) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 11, a message such as "It's hot!" indicating that the jackpot expectation level is higher than pattern AS-1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined performance pattern is pattern AS-3. As shown in -30(K), a message such as "Super Hot!" is displayed on the image display device 5 indicating that the jackpot expectation level is higher than that of pattern AS-2.

On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect is as shown in Figures 11-31 (L) to 11-31 (P). In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, so that the setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. settings are suggested. Furthermore, when the performance pattern of the setting value suggestion performance is pattern SS-5, the setting value suggestion image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all characters to be displayed on the image display device 5 in patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-read notice, the pending memory display is The settings suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when it is displayed as a white square or star. Therefore, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the player may use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone to suggest the settings in advance, expecting that the setting suggestion effect will be executed. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the performance. In other words, the pending storage display in the form of a blue or red camera in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect that prompts the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character performance and a timer performance with a higher jackpot expectation level than the character performance as a suggestion performance during the front variable display that suggests the jackpot expectation level, and FIG. As shown in -26 (D), when a timer effect is executed during variable display, setting suggestion effects are used as suggestion effects during rear variable display at a higher rate than when character effects are executed during variable display. executed. In other words, when a timer effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when a character effect is executed, and the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result will be a jackpot. The setting suggestion performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as a front variable display suggestion effect during variable display, in addition to the character effect, a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the rear variable display suggestion effect can be executed, so the setting suggestion effect can be executed. By being executed, the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as a timer effect, the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during rear variable display is displayed as a numerical value (see FIGS. 11-29(D) and 11-29(E)). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the timer effect may include, for example, displaying an increase or decrease on a gauge or meter to indicate that the rear variable display is in progress. The period up to the start of execution of the performance may not be clearly announced (only an approximate period may be indicated).

Furthermore, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-29(D) and 11-29(E), a mode in which the timer effect is executed by displaying an image on the image display device 5 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission from the game effect lamp 9, and display means other than the image display device 5. Any one of the display modes or a combination of a plurality of display modes may be executed.

Furthermore, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 (H) and 11-31 (L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as a timer effect. Based on this, a jackpot suggestion performance may be executed as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display in addition to the setting suggestion performance. In other words, even if the timer effect is executed, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed instead of the setting suggestion effect, so that surprise can be produced and the game enjoyment can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect reaches 0, a setting suggestion effect and a jackpot suggestion effect are performed as a suggestion effect during rear variable display. Although a mode in which only one of these can be executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. , it may be possible to execute both the setting suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display.

Further, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when a timer effect is executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display, a suggestion effect during rear variable display is always executed. The invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is not executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-27 (B) and 11-27 (C), the performance patterns of the timer performance include pattern TS-1 in which the performance period is 25 seconds and pattern TS-1 in which the performance period is 30 seconds. TS-2, and when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-28, since the rear variable display suggestion performance including the setting suggestion performance is executed during the reach performance period which is the latter half period of the super reach variable display, the setting suggestion performance by the player It is possible to further prevent overlooking.

In the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, a configuration is exemplified in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period which is the latter half period of the super reach variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the first half period of the variable display of super reach.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 and 11-22, the display mode of the pending memory display as a pre-read notice is changed to a white rectangle or star shape, or a blue or red camera. It is possible to execute a pending display preview effect that can be displayed depending on the display mode, etc., and the display mode is a variable display that corresponds to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is a blue or red camera mode. It is possible to decide whether to execute the setting suggestion performance at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display format is a white rectangle or star. For this reason, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the camera mode where the display mode is blue or red, the player depends on whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot. Since the setting suggestion performance is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 and 11-31, the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment corresponds to the pending memory display that is the target of the pending display preview effect when the pending display preview effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display preview performance ends). Therefore, since the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display that is the target of the pending display preview effect, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect. This can be further prevented.

In the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-read notice is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pending display notice may be used as a pre-read notice. It is also possible to enable a performance other than the performance, and to suggest that a setting suggestion performance is performed as a performance mode of the performance.

Furthermore, the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a setting suggestion effect can be executed in a variable display corresponding to a pending memory display that is a target of a pending display notice effect (a variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is finished). However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-19, the percentage of displaying the reserved memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in the form of a white square or star as a pre-read preview effect. Since the display rate is set lower than the display rate, the display of the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera makes it easier to play the game than when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star. This makes it possible to attract the attention of the technician, and further prevent the technician from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

Furthermore, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect is higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a white square or star as a pre-reading preview effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the suspended memory display may be displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-read preview effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white rectangle or star shape as a pre-reading preview effect, or it may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect. The ratio of displaying in the form and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white rectangle or star as a prefetch preview performance may be the same.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, as a pending display preview effect, the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby informing the player of preparations for photographing the setting suggestion effect. Since the player is prompted to do so, the player can prepare a digital terminal such as a smartphone before the setting suggestion performance starts, and the success rate of the player in photographing the setting suggestion performance can be increased.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display preview effect, the player is informed of preparations for photographing the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, the display from the speakers 8L and 8R Alternatively, the player may be prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion performance by outputting a sound, displaying a message image on the image display device 5, or the like.

Further, in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, a display pattern γ in which the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera and a display pattern δ in which the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera are used to create a pending display preview effect. If it is executable, and as shown in Figure 11-22 (A), the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera (when the value of the pending display flag is 3), and the pending memory display is displayed in red. The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is different between the case where the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4) and the case where the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player pays more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Note that in the feature section 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the pending memory display is not displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the mode does not change, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display mode of the reserved memory display changes from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. In addition, a case is provided in which a suspended memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as an active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from a blue camera mode to a red camera mode. It's okay. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed until the variable display ends, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-20, the rear variable display suggestion effect including the setting suggestion effect is limited to the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It is possible to execute it, and it will not be executed in the variable display of normal reach or non-reach variation patterns where the special figure variation time is short, so the setting suggestion effect is suppressed from being executed during the short variable display period, and the game This prevents the person from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-6 and 11-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so the super reach variable It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance while it is being displayed (during execution of the reach performance).

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-19, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is a super reach that can perform setting suggestion effects. Since this indicates that the display is variable, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-19, if the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if the special symbol fluctuation time is determined to be shorter than the super reach, a hold display is displayed. Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a preview effect, players may have noticed that the pending memory display was displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion performance from being not executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory display being a variable display such as non-reach or normal reach.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-20 to 11-28, during the variable display of Super Reach, it is possible to perform suggestion effects during the front variable display, including timer effects, but it is possible to perform suggestion effects during the variable display of Super Reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach where the figure fluctuation time is short, the timer effect is not executed during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect.The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies from occurring in the performance due to the execution of the above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-26(D), when a timer effect is executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display, as a suggestion effect during front variable display. The expectation of jackpot is set higher than when the character performance is executed, and the suggestion performance is set as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character performance is performed as a suggestion performance during the front variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-32 as a modified example 153SG-1, a timer effect may be executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display. If the ratio for determining character performance is set lower than the ratio for determining execution of a character performance as a suggestion performance during front variable display, and if a timer performance is executed as a suggestion performance during front variable display, The setting suggestion effect may be set to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the display suggestion effect.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, as a pre-read notice, a pending memory display is displayed in a white square, a star shape, or a blue color in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U of the image display device 5. 11-33(A) and 11-33(A) as modified example 153SG-2 have been exemplified. As shown in FIG. 11-33(B), when the pending storage display is displayed in the first pending storage display area 153SG005D or the second pending storage display area 153SG005U, the first pending storage display area 153SG005D is displayed on the image display device 5. If the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps with the effect image 153SG005E or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U, at least the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera is displayed with priority over the effect image 153SG005E (blue or red camera It is also possible to display the reserved memory display in the form such that it is not hidden by the effect image 153SG005E. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the pending memory display of the blue or red camera mode due to the effect image 153SG005E blocking the pending memory display of the blue or red camera mode. be able to.

Further, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, a configuration in which the setting suggestion performance can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 153SG-3, as shown in Figures 11-34 (A) and 11-34 (B), a setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds during the variable display of normal reach or non-reach without shortening. Good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for a period of 3 seconds (shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds).

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-22(A), the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera and the form of a red camera as the pending display preview effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and as a modification 153SG-4, a mode of a camera in which the pending memory display is blue is illustrated. The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggestion effect may be made different depending on whether the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the form of a red camera or in the form of a red camera. By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera or the form of a red camera as a pending display preview performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as the start timings of the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display of the super reach. Although we have exemplified a form in which it is easier to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display by executing the suggestion effect during the rear variable display based on the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and Modification Example 153SG- 5, if the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect will be patterned at a higher rate than when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. It may also be executed using a performance pattern that suggests a high setting value, such as SS-3 to pattern SS-5. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Further, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed in accordance with the effect executed as the suggestion effect during front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display preview effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed by only one of the display mode of the pending storage display and the display mode of the pending storage display. Furthermore, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, a configuration is exemplified in which setting suggestion performance can be executed as suggestion performance during rear variable display during variable display in which timer performance is executed as suggestion performance during front variable display. , the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a jackpot, the setting suggestion effect is set during the jackpot game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Furthermore, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, a mode is exemplified in which the execution of a new pending display notice performance is restricted when a pending display notice performance has already been executed, but the present invention is limited to this. If the hold display preview performance has already been executed, the execution of only some display patterns of the new hold display preview performance may be restricted. For example, if a hold display preview performance has already been executed in display pattern γ or display pattern δ (if the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new hold display preview performance will be executed. It is restricted only to what is executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (the reserved memory display is displayed as a white rectangle or star shape). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to simultaneous execution of a plurality of hold display preview performances with different suggested contents. Furthermore, in the case where the pending display preview performance has already been executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, it is possible to restrict the execution of a new pending display preview performance in the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention even more to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed. In addition, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (if the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect will be executed. By restricting only what is executed in display pattern γ or display pattern δ (the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not. This can attract even more attention from the players.

Note that although the feature section 153SG of the embodiment exemplifies a form in which a pending display preview effect can be executed as a pre-read effect in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this; In other words, it may be possible to perform performances other than the pending display preview performance as long as they can be executed at a timing before the start of the target variable display.

Further, in the feature section 153SG of the embodiment, a mode in which a character presentation and a timer presentation can be executed as a suggestion presentation during the front variable display that suggests that the variable display result is a jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestion performance during the front variable display, any performance other than the character performance or the timer performance may be possible as long as it is a performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 092IW)
Next, the characteristic part 092IW will be explained. This feature section 092IW executes a jackpot suggestion performance that suggests that the variable display result of the variable display will be a jackpot, and a preparation performance that foretells that the jackpot suggestion production will be executed before the jackpot suggestion production is executed. It is possible. In addition, the jackpot suggestion performance whose execution is foretold by the preparation performance is the pre-reading preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (the variable display whose execution is pending), and the jackpot confidence in the variable display during execution. It may be either a preview performance that foretells the degree. This feature section 092IW can execute a hold display preview performance, a timer performance, and a chance preview performance as jackpot suggestion performances. In addition, as a preparatory performance that foretells that the jackpot suggestion performance will be executed before the jackpot suggestion performance is executed, a hold display is displayed that foretells that the hold display preview performance will be executed before the jackpot suggestion performance is executed. It is possible to perform a preview preparation performance and a timer preparation performance that foretells that the timer performance will be executed before the timer performance is executed.

FIG. 12-1 is a part of a flowchart of the effect control process processing (step S76) in this feature section 092IW. In the production control process processing in this feature section 092IW, after executing the pre-read notice setting process (step S161) in which judgment, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read notice performance shown in FIG. A prefetch notice execution process (step 092IWS162) is executed, and then one of steps S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 is executed.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing a pre-read notice setting process (step S161) executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the performance control process shown in FIG. 12-1.

In the pre-read notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command at the time of one set of starting winnings has been received (step 092IWS001). Specifically, it is checked whether a set of starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, fluctuation category designation commands, and pending storage number notification commands are newly stored in the starting winning reception command buffer. In this example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the command at the time of starting winning is received, the received command at the time of starting winning is stored in the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning provided in the RAM 122. In this example, since the upper limit of the number of first pending memories and the number of second pending memories is 4, the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning has four storage spaces each corresponding to the first pending memory and the second pending memory. An area is provided. If no new command has been received for one set of starting winnings, the process is immediately terminated.

If a new command at the time of one set of starting winnings has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a pre-read preview performance is being executed (step 092IWS001). If a pre-read preview effect is being executed, the process is immediately terminated (that is, a new pre-read preview effect is not executed).

If the pre-read preview performance is not being executed, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of pending memories is 2 or more (step 092IWS002). If the number of pending memories is not 2 or more, the process is immediately terminated (that is, no new prefetch preview effect is executed). It should be noted that whether or not the number of pending memories is 2 or more can be determined, for example, by checking the pending memory number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100.

If the number of pending memories is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the pending display preview effect and the mode of effect when executing the effect (step 092IWS003).

The pending display preview performance is a performance that suggests that the display result of the corresponding variable display will be a jackpot by changing the display mode of the pending storage display (and active display) to a display mode different from the normal mode. In addition, in this feature part 092IW, as a pending display preview effect, a pattern is shown in which the display mode is changed at the time when the pending memory display is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. It may also include a pattern in which the display mode is displayed in a normal mode when the screen is displayed as an active display, and the display mode is changed when the screen is displayed as an active display. That is, it may be configured to be able to execute a pending display preview performance that changes the display mode of the pending memory display or active display at any timing from the start winning time until the end of the target variable display. Similarly, the hold display preview preparation performance that foretells that the hold display preview performance will be executed may also be configured to be executable at any timing from the start winning time to the end of the target variable display. Further, the display mode of the pending storage display or the active display may be configured to change multiple times. In this case, it may be possible to execute a corresponding hold display preview preparation performance for each hold display preview performance.

FIG. 12-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold display preview effect determination table. In step 092IWS003, a random number for performance determination is extracted, and with reference to the pending display notice performance determination table, the newly received starting winning command (symbol designation command and variable category command) is "non-reach", Based on whether it falls under "Super Reach Missed", "Jackpot other than Jackpot A", or "Jackpot A", the pending display notice performance will be changed to "No execution Pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "Execution" Decided to be one of the following: "Yes, pending memory display: 1st production mode (blue)", "Execution pending memory display: 2nd production mode (green)", and "Execution pending memory display: 3rd production mode (red)" do.

In the pending display preview effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-3(A), a judgment value corresponding to a random number for effect determination is assigned to each winning judgment result. The percentage of judged values is shown. In other words, for each prize-winning judgment result, regarding the pending display preview performance, "No execution pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "Execution pending memory display: 1st production mode (blue)", "Execution pending memory display" The ratio of which is determined is shown is "display: second performance mode (green)" and "execution pending storage display: third performance mode (red)". In this example, in addition to the hold display preview effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-3(A), the hold display preview effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-3(B) and the hold display preview effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-4(A) are used. Regarding the timer performance determination table, the timer preparation performance determination table shown in FIG. 12-4(B), and the chance preview performance determination table shown in FIG. 12-5(A), in order to simplify the explanation, any decision matter is The proportion determined is shown.

The characteristics of the pending display preview effect determination table will be explained. As shown in Figure 12-3 (A), in the pending display notice performance determination table, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", the pending display notice performance is "No Execution" compared to when it is "Lose". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of decisions that are determined to be ``executed'' is higher than that of ``execution.''. In addition, in the pending display preview production determination table, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", compared to the case of "Lose", "Execution pending memory display: 1st production mode (blue)" is "Execution pending memory display: 2nd production mode (green)" and "Execution pending memory display: 2nd production mode (green)" are determined to be "Execution pending memory display: 3rd production mode (red)." Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of With such a configuration, when the hold display preview effect is executed, the second effect mode (green) is more effective than the first effect mode (blue), and the third effect mode (red) is greater than the second effect mode (green). This suggests that when executed, it will be a jackpot. That is, the degree of expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of third presentation mode (red)>second presentation mode (green)>first presentation mode (blue)>no execution.

If it is determined in step 092IWS003 not to execute the pending display preview effect (N in step S092IWS004), the process moves to step S092IWS008, and if it is determined to be executed (Y in step S092IWS004), the effect control CPU 120 A suspended display preview performance flag indicating that it has been decided to execute the display preview performance is set (step S092IWS005).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode of the pending display preview preparation performance (step S092IWS006). The hold display preview preparation performance is one of the preparation performances, and is used to foretell that the hold display preview performance will be executed before the hold display preview performance is executed.

FIG. 12-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold display preview preparation effect determination table. In step 092IWS006, a random number for effect determination is extracted, and with reference to the pending display notice preparation effect determination table, the pending display notice preparation effect is selected as "No execution" or "Execution" based on the performance mode of the pending display notice preparation effect. Decide on either "with execution, 1st production mode (small effect)" or "with execution, 2nd production mode (large effect)."

The characteristics of the pending display preview preparation effect determination table will be explained. As shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), in the pending display notice preparation performance determination table, the higher the expectation level of the pending display notice preparation performance is that the performance mode will be a jackpot, the more the pending display notice preparation performance is "executed". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of determinations that are determined to be "with execution" is higher than with "no execution." In addition, in the hold display preview preparation performance determination table, the higher the expectation level of the hold display preview performance that will be a jackpot, the higher the performance mode that is expected to lead to a jackpot, the higher the performance mode is the "first performance mode with execution (small effect)". Judgment values are assigned such that the ratio of "2 production mode (large effect)" is determined to be high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a jackpot will occur when the pending display preview preparation effect is executed, and further when it is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) rather than the first effect mode (small effect). That will happen. That is, the expectation level of hitting the jackpot increases in the order of second presentation mode (large effect)>first presentation mode (small effect)>no execution.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of pending memories is 3 or more (step 092IWS007). If the number of pending memories is not 3 or more, the process is immediately terminated. It should be noted that whether or not the number of pending memories is 3 or more can be determined, for example, by checking the pending memory number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100.

When the number of pending memories is 3 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode when executing it (step 092IWS008).

The timer effect suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot from the start timing of the target variable display, and also suggests the period until the start of execution of a specific effect (for example, a suggestion effect during rear variable display in the characteristic section 153SG). It's a performance.

In this characteristic part 092IW, since the timer effect is executed during the target variable display, for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171) of the variable display for which it is decided to execute the timer effect, the timer effect is executed. This is achieved by setting a performance control pattern and executing various performance controls based on the performance control pattern in the variable display performance process (S172).

Note that this is not limited to the configuration of the feature section 092IW, and for example, it may not be determined whether or not to execute a timer effect at the time of starting winning, but may determine whether or not to execute a timer preparation effect, which will be described later, and the mode of effect when executed. When the target variable display is started, it may be determined whether or not to execute the timer effect. Further, in this case, depending on whether or not to perform the timer preparation performance and the performance mode, whether or not to perform the timer performance and the performance mode when executing the timer performance may be determined at different rates.

Furthermore, for example, the timer effect may be started during a variable display that is executed before the target variable display, or at a timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the target variable display is started. You may start it. That is, the timer effect may be started at any timing from the timing of the starting prize winning to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, for the timer preparation performance that foretells that the timer performance will be executed, any timing from the timing of the starting prize winning until the target variable display ends (however, until the time when the execution period of the timer performance can be secured) You may also start with .

FIG. 12-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table. In step 092IWS008, a random number for performance determination is extracted, and the timer performance determination table is referred to to determine whether the newly received starting winning command (symbol designation command and variable category command) is "non-super reach" or "super reach". Based on whether the timer effect corresponds to “out of reach” or “super reach jackpot”, the timer effect is “no execution”, “first effect with execution (25 seconds)” and “second effect with execution (30 seconds)”. (Seconds)".

The characteristics of the timer effect determination table will be explained. As shown in Figure 12-4 (A), in the timer performance determination table, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", compared to the case of "Lose", the timer performance is more likely to be "No Execution" than "No Execution". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of executions determined to be "executed" is high. In addition, in the timer performance determination table, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", compared to the case of "Lose", "1st performance mode with execution (25 seconds)" is better than "2nd performance with execution (25 seconds)". Judgment values are assigned such that the percentage determined for "Aspect (30 seconds)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a jackpot will occur when the timer effect is executed, and when it is executed in the second effect mode (30 seconds) rather than the first effect mode (25 seconds). Become. That is, the expectation level for a jackpot increases in the order of second presentation mode (30 seconds)>first presentation mode (25 seconds)>no execution.

If it is determined in step 092IWS008 not to execute the timer effect (N in step S092IWS009), the process moves to step S092IWS012, and if it is determined to be executed (Y in step S092IWS009), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect. A timer effect flag indicating that it has been decided to execute is set (step S092IWS010).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode of the timer preparation performance (step S092IWS011). The timer preparation performance is one of the preparation performances, and is used to foretell that the timer performance will be executed before the timer performance is executed.

FIG. 12-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer preparation effect determination table. In step 092IWS006, a random number for performance determination is extracted, and the timer preparation performance determination table is referred to, and based on the performance mode of the timer performance, the timer preparation performance is determined to be ``no execution'', ``with execution, first performance mode ( Decide on either "Execution (second effect)" and "Second production mode with execution (large effect)".

The characteristics of the timer preparation performance determination table will be explained. As shown in Figure 12-4 (B), in the timer preparation performance determination table, the higher the expectation level of the timer preparation performance that will be a jackpot, the more likely the timer preparation performance is to be executed than ``no execution''. Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of "Yes" decisions is high. In addition, in the timer preparation performance determination table, the higher the expectation of the timer performance to be a jackpot, the more likely it is that the ``first performance mode with execution (character A)'' is better than the ``second performance mode with execution (character A)''. The determination values are assigned so that the percentage of characters determined to be "Character B)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a jackpot will occur when the timer preparation performance is executed, and when it is executed in the second performance mode (character B) rather than the first performance mode (character A). become. That is, the expectation level for a jackpot increases in the order of second presentation mode (character B)>first presentation mode (character A)>no execution.

This feature section 092IW is configured such that the performance mode of the executable jackpot suggestion performance differs depending on which performance mode of the preparation performance is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), when the hold display preview preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the hold display is executed by any of the first to third effect modes. When the preview performance is executed and the hold display preview preparation performance in the second performance mode is executed, the hold display preview performance is executed in one of the second to third performance modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4(B), when the timer preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed, the timer performance is executed according to any of the first to second performance modes, and the timer preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed. When the timer effect in the second effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed in the second effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the level of expectation depending on the performance mode of the preparation performance, and for each performance mode of the preparation performance (i.e., each expectation level), it is possible to vary the level of expectation depending on the performance mode of the preparation performance (that is, for each expectation level). It is possible to suitably adjust the degree of expectation.

Further, in this feature section 092IW, the jackpot suggestion performance is configured to be executable without executing the corresponding preparation performance. Specifically, when it is decided to execute the hold display preview performance or the timer performance, it may be determined that the hold display preview preparation performance or the timer preparation performance will not be executed (Figure 12-3 (B), Figure 12- 4(B)). The ease of execution is configured to vary depending on whether or not an incompatible preparation performance has been executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-3, if the winning determination result is a jackpot, it is likely to be determined to execute the pending display preview performance and the pending display preview preparation performance. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4, it is likely to be determined that a timer effect is also executed. However, it may be determined not to execute the timer preparation performance. Then, when the hold display preview preparation performance that does not correspond to the timer performance is executed, the timer performance is more likely to be executed than when the hold display preview preparation performance is not executed. With such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

Note that this feature section 092IW is configured such that when a preparation performance is executed, a corresponding jackpot suggestion performance is always executed, but for example, as a preparation performance, a corresponding jackpot suggestion performance may be executed after the performance. It may be configured to be able to perform a normal preparation performance in which the game is performed and a fake preparation performance in which the corresponding jackpot suggestion performance is not performed after the performance. In this case, when the false pending display notice preparation performance is executed, compared to when the false pending display notice preparation performance is not executed, the timer performance (which may or may not be accompanied by a timer preparation performance) It may be possible to increase the rate of execution of the program (even if the program is not executed). With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment when the pending display preview preparation performance is fake, and it is possible to suitably maintain the player's interest.

In addition, this feature section 092IW is configured such that the ratio of which presentation mode of jackpot suggestion presentation is executed varies depending on whether or not the preparation presentation has been executed. Specifically, when the performance mode of the hold display preview performance and the timer preparation performance is determined to be the second performance mode, compared to the case where the performance mode is determined to be the first performance mode, the hold display notice preparation performance and the timer preparation performance are The percentage of decisions to execute is high (see Figures 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance preview performance (step 092IWS012).

The chance eye preview performance is performed by deriving and displaying a chance eye pattern (in this example, a combination of decorative patterns that is "123") as a display result of a variable display that is executed before the target variable display. This is an effect that suggests that the variable display result of the variable display (or any of the variable displays whose target variable display is not specified and is stored pending) will be a jackpot.

FIG. 12-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance preview performance determination table. In step 092IWS012, a random number for performance determination is extracted, and the chance eye preview performance determination table is referred to to determine whether the newly received starting winning command (symbol designation command and variable category command) is "non-super reach", Based on whether it falls under any of "super reach miss", "jackpot other than jackpot A", and "jackpot A", either "no execution" or "execution" is determined for the chance eye preview performance.

The characteristics of the chance preview performance determination table will be explained. As shown in Figure 12-5 (A), in the chance eye preview performance determination table, when the winning judgment result is "Jackpot", compared to the case where it is "miss", the chance eye preview performance is "No Execution". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of decisions that are determined to be ``executed'' is higher than that of ``execution.''. With such a configuration, when the chance preview effect is executed, it is suggested that a jackpot will be achieved.

This feature section 092IW is configured to be able to execute a hold display preview performance, a timer performance, and a chance notice performance as jackpot suggestion performances, but FIGS. 12-3 (A), 12-4 (A), and As shown in 12-5 (A), with regard to the chance preview performance, the percentage of execution when the prize winning judgment result is a jackpot is lower than that of the pending display announcement display or the timer performance, and the percentage of execution when the winning judgment result is a jackpot is lower. Since the percentage of winnings is high, the difference in the percentage of execution is small when the winning determination result is a jackpot and when it is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot is lower in the chance preview performance than in the hold display preview performance or the timer performance.

If it is determined in step 092IWS012 not to execute the chance notice effect (N in step S092IWS013), the process moves to step S092IWS015, and if it is determined to be executed (Y in step S092IWS013), the effect control CPU 120 A chance eye preview performance flag indicating that it has been decided to execute the eye preview performance is set (step S092IWS014).

Next, if the pending display preview performance flag is set (Y in step S092IWS015), the performance control CPU 120 displays a new pending memory display in accordance with the determination of the pending display preview preparation performance (step S092IWS016). .

In step S092IWS016, for example, if it is determined to execute the pending display preview preparation performance in the first performance mode, the image display device 5 displays a new pending memory display in the normal mode, and also displays the pending memory display in the normal mode. A small effect image (for example, see the small effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 12-11 (B1)) is displayed near the . In addition, when it is determined to execute the pending display preview preparation performance in the second presentation mode, the image display device 5 displays a new pending memory display in the normal mode, and also displays an effect near the pending memory display. A large image (for example, see the large effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 12-11 (A1)) is displayed.

Next, if the timer effect flag is not set (N in step S092IWS017), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process, and if the timer effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS017), It is checked whether the pending display preview preparation performance is the first performance mode (step S092IWS018). If the pending display preview preparation performance is the first performance mode (Y in step S092IWS018), the performance control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation performance (step S092IWS019). After that, the process ends.

In step S092IWS019 (and step S092IWS022, which will be described later), for example, if it is determined to execute the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character A that foretells that the timer effect will be executed. An image (for example, see image 092IW005 of character A in FIG. 12-10(E)) is displayed. Further, when it is determined to execute the timer preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character B image that foretells that the timer effect will be executed.

If the pending display preview production flag is not set in step S092IWS015 (N in step S092IWS015), the production control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display in the normal mode (step S092IWS020).

Next, if the timer effect flag is not set (N in step S092IWS021), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process, and if the timer effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS021), A timer preparation effect is executed (step S092IWS022). After that, the process ends.

FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart showing the advance notice execution process (step 092IWS161) that the performance control CPU 120 executes in the performance control process shown in FIG. 12-1.

In the pre-read notice execution process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the pending display notice performance flag is set (Step 092IWS102) if it is the shift timing of the pending memory (Y in step 092IWS101). .

If the hold display preview performance flag is set (Y in step 092IWS102), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the hold display preview preparation performance is being executed (step 092IWS103).

If the hold display preview preparation performance is being executed (Y in step 092IWS103), the performance control CPU 120 ends the hold display preview preparation performance and executes the hold display preview performance (step 092IWS104).

Next, if the timer effect flag is set (Y in step 092IWS105), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the timer preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS106).

If the timer preparation performance is not being executed (N in step 092IWS103), the performance control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation performance (step 092IWS107).

Next, the execution timings of the hold display preview performance, the hold display preview preparation performance, and the timer performance and timer preparation performance will be explained. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the hold display preview performance (preparation performance) and the timer performance (preparation performance).

FIG. 12-7(A) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display preview performance and the pending display preview preparation performance at the time of starting winning. In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the prefetch notice setting process shown in Figure 12-2), and is held at the shift timing of the pending memory. After the display preview preparation performance is completed, the suspended display preview performance is executed (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the prefetched preview execution process shown in FIG. 12-6).

FIG. 12-7(B) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the timer preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS021 to 092IWS022 of the advance notice setting process shown in Figure 12-2), and at the start timing of the target variable display. After the timer preparation performance is completed, the timer performance is started (for example, a performance control pattern for executing the timer performance is set in the variable display start setting process (S171), and an output control pattern is set in the variable display performance process (S172)). (This is realized by executing various performance controls based on patterns).

FIG. 12-7 (C) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice performance and the pending display notice preparation performance (first performance mode), and the timer performance and timer notice preparation performance at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2), and , a timer preparation effect is started (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS018 to 092IWS019 of the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2). Then, at the shift timing of the pending memory, the pending display preview preparation performance is completed and the pending display preview performance is executed (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the prefetched preview execution process shown in FIG. 12-6). Thereafter, at the start timing of the target variable display, the timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect is started (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), a effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, This is realized by executing various effects controls based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

FIG. 12-7 (D) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice performance and the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode), and the timer performance and timer notice preparation performance at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display preview preparation performance (first performance mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the advance preview setting process shown in FIG. 12-2). , the timer preparation effect is not started (e.g., corresponds to the process of step 092IWS018 of the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-2). Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect is completed at the shift timing of the pending memory and the pending display notice preliminary effect is executed (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the prefetch notice execution process shown in FIG. 12-6). , a timer preparation effect is started (e.g., corresponds to steps 092IWS105 to 092IWS107 of the advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 12-6). Thereafter, at the start timing of the target variable display, the timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect is started (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), a effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, This is realized by executing various effects controls based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

Next, performance aspects of the hold display preview preparation performance and the timer preparation performance will be described. FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing performance aspects of the hold display preview preparation performance and the timer preparation performance.

FIG. 12-8 shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice performance and the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode), and the timer performance and timer notice preparation performance at the time of starting winning. Corresponds to example -7(D).

As shown in FIGS. 12-8(A) and (B), a new starting prize occurs during the variable display, and based on the starting winning, a pending display notice performance and a pending display notice preparation performance (second presentation mode) When it is decided to execute the timer performance and the timer preview preparation performance (first performance mode), a new pending memory display is displayed in the normal mode in the first pending memory display area 092IW001 and the second pending memory display area 092IW002. Ru. At this time, the pending display preview preparation performance (second performance mode) is started, and a lightning-shaped, large-effect image 092IW004a is displayed near the new pending storage display. Note that the timer notice preparation performance is restricted from being executed at the same time as the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode), so it is not executed at this timing.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-8(C) to 12-8(D), when the variable display ends, the pending memory is shifted, and a new variable display starts, the pending display notice is prepared. The performance (second performance mode) ends progressively (for example, a display control is performed in which the lightning-shaped, large-effect image 092IW004a acts on the pending memory display and disappears), and the display mode of the pending memory display changes to red. A pending display preview performance (third performance mode) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-8(E), a timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is started, and an image 092IW005 of character A is displayed, which foretells that the timer effect will be executed.

After that, as shown in Figures 12-8 (F) to 12-8 (G), when a new variable display that is the target of the timer effect is started, the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is advanced. Then, a timer effect (first effect mode) is started in which the timer is updated and displayed for 25 seconds, which is the period until the specific effect during the variable display.

This feature section 092IW is configured to be able to execute a hold display preview performance and a timer performance as a jackpot suggestion performance that suggests that the variable display result of the variable display will be a jackpot. In addition, there is a hold display preview preparation effect that foretells that the hold display preview effect will be executed before the hold display preview effect is executed, and a timer that foretells that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed. The preparatory performance is configured to be executable as a preparatory performance.

Such a preparation performance has the function of drawing attention to the jackpot suggestion performance that is executed after the preparation performance, but if multiple preparation performances are executed at the same time, the player's expectations will become too high, and as a result, it will not be possible to hit the jackpot. If this is not the case, there is a risk that interest will be greatly diminished. Therefore, in this feature section 092IW, it is restricted that a plurality of preparation performances are executed at the same time. Specifically, the hold display preview preparation performance (second performance mode) and the timer preparation performance have different execution periods and are configured so that they are not executed at the same time (in this example, the hold display preview preparation performance (second performance mode) is configured such that they are not executed simultaneously. After the execution of the second presentation mode) is completed, the timer preparation presentation is executed (see FIG. 12-7(D)). With such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration of this feature section 092IW, the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode) and the timer preparation performance are configured so that their execution periods do not overlap at all, but for example, at least the start timing and The execution period may be made different by making any one of the end timings different from the end timing.

Furthermore, in the configuration of this feature section 092IW, the hold display notice preparation performance (first performance mode), which has a lower level of expectation than the hold display notice preparation performance (second performance mode), can be executed simultaneously with the timer preparation display. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and the timer preparation is performed at a predetermined rate even if the hold display notice preparation performance (first performance mode) is not as strong as the hold display notice preparation performance (second performance mode). It may be configured not to be executed at the same time as the performance. Further, a plurality of preparation effects may not always be executed at the same time.

Further, for example, the performance mode of the pending display preview preparation performance is a first performance mode with lower expectations than the second performance mode, and the performance mode of the timer preparation performance is the first performance mode with lower expectations than the second performance mode. They may be executed at the same time only in the production mode.

Furthermore, for example, if multiple preparatory effects are executed simultaneously (or if multiple preparatory effects are simultaneously executed in a second presentation mode with high expectations), a jackpot may be determined. .

Furthermore, in the configuration of this feature section 092IW, a pattern in which the display mode of the pending memory display changes once is shown, but a pattern in which the display mode of the pending memory display (and active display) changes multiple times is provided. If the pending memory display (or active display) is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (specifically, a display mode in which there is a display mode with higher expectations), the suspended memory display (or active display) An effect that suggests that the display mode of the display (or active display) will change (for example, if an arrow flies toward the retained memory display (or active display) and hits the retained memory display (or active display), the display will change. , a performance that does not change unless it is stabbed (such as a special performance that is performed only when the suspended memory display (or active display) is in a display mode other than the normal display mode) may be executed more frequently. , or conversely, it may be prevented from being executed.

Next, a process for executing the chance notice effect will be explained. FIG. 12-9 is a flowchart showing an example of a chance notice setting process. The chance preview setting process is executed as a part of the variable display start setting process (step S171) that the performance control CPU 120 executes in the performance control process process shown in FIG. 12-1.

In the chance preview setting process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the chance preview performance flag is set (step 092IWS201). If the chance preview performance flag is set, it is determined whether the chance preview performance can be executed using the chance preview performance determination table (step 092 IWS202).

FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute a chance notice. As shown in Figure 12-10, if neither the pending display preview preparation performance nor the timer preparation performance is being executed, 100% of the time it is "executable" (that is, execution of the chance preview performance is not executed). It is decided that the In addition, if either the pending display preview preparation performance or the timer preparation performance is being executed in the second performance mode, 20% of the time the performance is "executable" (that is, execution of the chance preview performance is permitted). At a rate of 80%, it is determined that the execution is not allowed (that is, the execution of the chance preview performance is not permitted). In addition, if either the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is being executed in the first effect mode (and neither is being executed in the second effect mode), the percentage is 100%. In this case, it is determined that the execution is not allowed (that is, execution of the chance preview performance is not permitted).

If execution of the chance eye preview performance is permitted in step 092IWS202 (Y in step 092IWS203), the stop pattern of the decorative symbols is determined to be the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decorative symbols that is "123") (step 092IWS204). In addition, before step 092IWS204, if the stop symbol of the decorative pattern has already been determined, the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is changed to the chance pattern.

Next, the performance aspects of the hold display preview preparation performance and the chance preview performance will be explained. FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram showing performance aspects of the hold display preview preparation performance and the chance preview performance.

As shown in FIGS. 12-11 (A1) and (A2), the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is executed, and the lightning-shaped, large-effect image 092IW004a is displayed near the pending memory display. Occasionally, execution of the chance eye preview effect may be permitted, and if execution is permitted, the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decorative symbols that is "123") is used as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Is displayed. That is, the pending display preview preparation performance (second performance mode) and the chance preview performance are executed simultaneously.

As shown in FIGS. 12-11 (B1) and (B2), the hold display preview preparation effect (first effect mode) is executed, and a lightning bolt-shaped effect image 092IW004b of small and large size is displayed near the hold memory display. When there is a chance eye preview performance, execution is not permitted, so a stop symbol of a decorative pattern different from the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decorative symbols "123") is displayed. That is, the pending display preview preparation performance (first performance mode) and the chance preview performance are not executed at the same time.

In this feature part 092IW, as a jackpot suggestion performance, it is possible to execute a chance notice performance separately from the pending display notice notice performance and the timer performance, and this chance notice notice performance is a preparatory performance called the pending display notice preparation performance and the timer preparation performance. 12-11 (A1) and (A2)). Further, as described above, the expectation of a jackpot is lower in the chance preview performance than in the hold display preview performance or the timer performance. Therefore, when the preparation performance is being executed (that is, before the jackpot suggestion performance is executed and the expectation level is unknown), the chance preview performance with low expectation of becoming a jackpot is executed. This may reduce the performance effect of the preparation performance. Furthermore, the suggested level of expectation may become difficult to understand. Therefore, this feature section 092IW is configured so that the opportunity preview performance is more likely to be executed when the pending display preview preparation performance or the timer preparation performance is not being executed ( For example, see Figure 12-10). With such a configuration, interest can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in this feature section 092IW, a chance notice is given when the preparatory performance for the first performance mode is executed and when the preparatory performance for the second performance mode, which has a higher expectation level than the first performance mode, is executed. They are configured to differ in the ease with which they can be performed. Specifically, the chance preview performance is more effective when the hold display preview preparation performance is executed in the second performance mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first production mode (small effect). It is configured so that execution is easily permitted (see Figure 12-10). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably maintain interest while ensuring an opportunity to execute the chance preview performance.

As explained above, this feature section 092IW provides a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). An executable suggestive performance execution means, and a preparatory performance that can execute a preparatory performance that foretells that the suggestive performance will be executed before the suggestive performance is executed (for example, a pending display notice preparatory performance, a timer preparatory performance, etc.) The suggestion performance includes a first suggestion performance (for example, a pending display notice performance) and a second suggestion performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first suggestion performance, and the preparation performance includes a first suggestion performance (for example, a timer performance). A first preparatory effect that foretells that the first suggestion effect will be executed (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect), and a second preparation effect that foretells that the second suggestion effect will be executed (for example, a timer preparation effect, etc.) The first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance can be executed at the same time, and the first preparation performance and the second preparation performance are restricted from being executed at the same time (for example, pending display notice preparation The performance (second performance mode) and the timer preparation performance are not executed at the same time (see FIG. 12-7(D)). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive display that can execute a suggestive display (for example, a pending display notice display, a timer display, a chance notice display, etc.) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) comprising an execution means and a preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the suggestion performance will be executed before the suggestion performance is executed; The suggestion performance includes a first suggestion performance (for example, a pending display notice performance), a second suggestion performance (for example, a timer performance) that is different from the first suggestion performance, and the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance. includes a different third suggestion performance (for example, a chance preview performance), and the preparation performance includes a first preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance) that foretells that the first suggestion performance will be executed; The third suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance are executed in parallel during the same period. (See Figures 12-11 (A1) and (A2)) The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the third suggestion effect is not executed (for example, see FIG. 12-10). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive display that can execute a suggestive display (for example, a pending display notice display, a timer display, a chance notice display, etc.) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) comprising an execution means and a preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the suggestion performance will be executed before the suggestion performance is executed; Suggestion performances include multiple types of first suggestion performances with different expectations (for example, pending display preview performances with different expectations depending on the production mode), and second suggestion performances that are different from the first suggestion production (for example, timer performances). The first suggestion performance includes a predetermined first suggestion performance and a special first suggestion performance whose expectation level is higher than that of the predetermined first suggestion performance (for example, a hold display in the first presentation mode (blue) (including a preview performance and a hold display preview performance in a third performance mode (red)), and the preparation performance is a first preparation performance that foretells that the first suggestion performance will be executed (for example, a hold display preview preparation performance). and a second preparation performance (for example, a timer preparation performance) that foretells that the second suggested performance will be executed, and the first preparation performance includes, as a performance mode, a first production mode and the first production mode. There is a second presentation mode in which the special first suggestion presentation is more likely to be executed (for example, there is a first presentation mode (small effect) and a second presentation mode (large effect), and a second presentation mode (large effect). ), when the hold display preview preparation effect of 1 is executed, the hold display preview effect of the first effect mode (blue) is not executed, and the hold display notice effect of the 3rd effect mode (red) is likely to be executed. 3 (B)), the execution ratio of the second preparation performance is different between when the first preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed and when the first preparation performance of the second production mode is executed ( For example, the timer preparation effect is executed at the same time when the hold display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode (small effect) is being executed, but the hold display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode (large effect) is executed. (See Figure 12-7). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive display that can execute a suggestive display (for example, a pending display notice display, a timer display, a chance notice display, etc.) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) comprising an execution means and a preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.) that foretells that the suggestion performance will be executed before the suggestion performance is executed; Suggestion performances include multiple types of first suggestion performances with different expectations (for example, pending display preview performances with different expectations depending on the production mode), and second suggestion performances that are different from the first suggestion production (for example, timer performances). and a third suggestion performance (for example, a chance preview performance) that is different from the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, and the first suggestion performance includes a predetermined first suggestion performance and the predetermined first suggestion performance. Includes a special first suggestion performance that has higher expectations than the performance (for example, includes a hold display preview performance in the first performance mode (blue) and a hold display preview performance in the third performance mode (red)), and prepares. The performances include a first preparation performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance) that foretells that the first suggestion performance will be executed, and a second preparation performance that foretells that the second suggestion performance will be executed (for example, a timer). The third suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel during the same period (see Figures 12-11 (A1) and (A2)). The first preparation performance includes a first performance mode and a second performance mode in which the special first suggestion performance is more likely to be executed than the first production mode (for example, the first production mode (small effect) and There is a second presentation mode (large effect), and when the pending display notice preparation presentation of the second presentation mode (large effect) is executed, the pending display notice presentation presentation of the first presentation mode (blue) is not executed, and the second presentation mode (large effect) is executed. The pending display preview performance of the third performance mode (red) is likely to be executed (see Figure 12-3 (B)), when the first preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed, and when the first preparation performance of the second performance mode is executed. The execution rate of the third suggestion performance differs depending on when the performance is executed (for example, in the chance notice performance, when the pending display notice preparation performance is executed in the second performance mode (large effect), Execution is more likely to be permitted than when executed in the first production mode (small effect) (see Figure 12-10). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in this feature part 092IW, the first preparation performance and the second preparation performance are executed for different periods (for example, after the execution of the pending display notice preparation performance (second performance mode) is completed, the timer preparation performance is is executed (see Figure 12-7(D)). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in this feature section 092IW, the first suggested presentation includes multiple types of presentation modes (for example, a first presentation mode (blue), a second presentation mode (green), a third presentation mode (red), etc.). 3(A)), and the first preparatory performance is performed in multiple types of performance modes (for example, the first performance mode (small effect), the second performance mode (large effect), etc.). -3 (B)), and the production mode of the executable first suggestion production differs depending on which production mode the first preparation production is executed (for example, When the hold display preview preparation performance in the first performance mode is executed, the hold display preview performance is executed in one of the first to third performance modes, and the hold display notice preparation performance in the second performance mode is executed. (If this is the case, a hold display preview performance is executed using one of the second and third performance modes). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, the suggestion effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect (for example, when it is decided to execute the pending display notice preview effect or the timer effect, the suggestive effect may be executed without executing the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer effect). There are cases where it is decided that the timer preparation effect will not be executed (see Figures 12-3 (B) and 12-4 (B)), and the ease with which it will be executed depends on whether or not an incompatible preparation effect has been executed. (For example, as shown in Figure 12-3, if the winning determination result is a jackpot, it is likely to be determined that the pending display notice performance and the pending display notice preparation performance are executed. Also, as shown in Figure 12-4, In this case, it is easy to decide to execute the timer effect. However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, when the hold display preview preparation effect that does not correspond to the timer effect is executed, the hold display is more likely to be executed. (The timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the preview preparation effect is not executed.) Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

In addition, in this feature section 092IW, the ratio of which presentation mode of suggestion presentation is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation presentation is executed (for example, the presentation presentation of the pending display notice presentation or the timer preparation presentation). When this is determined as the second performance mode, the proportion of decisions to execute the pending display notice preparation performance or the timer preparation performance is higher than when it is determined as the first performance mode.Figure 12-3 (B), (See Figure 12-4(B)). Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain interest.

Note that the configuration shown in the feature section 092IW can be appropriately combined with the configurations shown in other feature sections such as the feature section 153SG to configure a gaming machine. For example, the timer preparation effect shown in the feature section 092IW suggests that there will be a jackpot as shown in the feature section 153SG, and also indicates that the timer effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display will be executed. The timer performance can be a jackpot suggestion performance that suggests a jackpot or a setting suggestion performance that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a suggestion performance during the rear variable display during the reach performance. It may be configured as follows.

1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Game machine frame 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize opening 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Ball operating handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Microcomputer for game control 101, 121...ROM
102, 122...RAM
103...CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123...Display control section

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect indicating that the control is in the advantageous state;
Preparation performance execution means capable of executing a preparation performance that foretells that the suggestion performance will be executed before the suggestion performance is executed;
The suggestion performance includes a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance, and a third suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance,
The preparation performance includes a first preparation performance that foretells that the first suggestion performance will be executed, and a second preparation performance that foretells that the second suggestion performance will be executed,
The first preparation performance and the second suggestion performance have different execution periods,
The third suggestion performance, the first preparation performance, and the second preparation performance can be executed in parallel in the same period and independently from each other,
The third suggestion is more effective when neither the first preparatory effect nor the second preparatory effect is executed than when either the first preparatory effect or the second preparatory effect is executed. Directions are easier to execute,
The first preparation performance includes a first performance mode and a second performance mode that is controlled to be more advantageous than the first performance mode and has a higher expectation level,
When the first preparation performance is executed in the second performance mode, the first preparation performance is executed in parallel with the third suggestion performance more than when the first preparation performance is executed in the first performance mode. A high percentage of
The third suggestion performance has a lower degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance,
The preparation performance execution means is capable of executing the first preparation performance in a first performance pattern in which the first suggestion performance is executed after execution, and a second performance pattern in which the first suggestion performance is not performed after execution. can be,
When the first preparation performance is executed in the second performance pattern, the second suggestion performance is more likely to be executed than when the first preparation performance is not performed in the second performance pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by: